Key Benefits:
Inland waterway system
The Secretary of State for Transport and Water,
Having regard to the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine and the Protocols thereto, and Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 of the Council of the European Communities of 19 July 1968 applying rules of competition in respect of transport by rail, road and inland waterway (PbEG L 175); Directive No 76 /135/EEC COUNCIL of the European Communities of 20 January 1976 on the reciprocal recognition of navigability licences for inland waterway vessels (PbEG L 021); Regulation (EEC) No 320/76 No 2919/85/of the Council of the European Communities of 17 October 1985 laying down the conditions for eligibility for the regime reserved for the purposes of the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine for the purposes of which the vessels belonging to the Rhine navigation (PbEG L 280); Directive No 87 /540/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 9 November 1987 on admission to the occupation of carrier of national and international transport of goods by inland waterway and on the mutual recognition of this profession relating to inland waterway transport diplomas, certificates and other evidence of formal qualifications (PbEG L 322); Regulation (EEC) 3921/91 -of the Council of the European Communities of 16 December 1991 laying down the conditions under which non-member carriers may operate domestic goods or passengers by inland waterway in a Member State where they do not are established (PbEG L 373); Directive No 91 /672/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 16 December 1991 on mutual recognition of national boatmasters ' certificates for the carriage of goods and passengers by inland waterway (PbEG L 373); Regulation (EEC) 3912/92 checks carried out by the Council of the European Communities of 17 December 1992 on checks carried out in the field of road and inland waterway transport in the Community of means of transport registered or admitted to circulation in a third country (PbEG L 395); Regulation (EEC) 1356/96 of the Council of the European Union of 8 July 1996 laying down common rules for the carriage of goods or persons by inland waterway between Member States in order to ensure the freedom to provide services in this transport operation (PbEU L 175); Directive No 96 /50/EC of the Council of the European Union of 23 July 1996 on the harmonisation of conditions for the issue of national boatmasters ' certificates for inland waterway vessels used in the carriage of goods and passengers in the Community (PbEU L 235); Directive No 2005 /36/EC from the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications (PbEU L 255); Regulation (EC) 1365/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union of 6 September 2006 on statistics relating to the carriage of goods by inland waterway and repealing Regulation Directive No 80 /1119/EEC of the Council of the European Union (PbEU L 264); Directive No 2006 /87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of the European Union of 12 December 2006 laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Regulation Directive No 82 /714/EEC of the Council (PbEU L 389); Regulation (EC) 21/07 of the Commission of the European Communities of 19 April 2007 implementing Regulation (EC) 1365/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union on statistics relating to the carriage of goods by inland waterway (PbEU L 103);
and having regard to the Articles 1, 1st paragraph , 2 , 6, second, third and fifth members , 8, first and second members , 9, second paragraph , 13, first paragraph , 14 first and second members , 19, 1st Member , 21, second paragraph , 22, first and fourth members , 24, third member , 29, second paragraph, part c , 31, 1st Member , 32, first and second members , 33, 1st Member , 40, second paragraph , 43, 1st Member , and 48, fourth member, of the Inland Law and 33, first and second paragraph, of the General Law on Recognition of the Communities ' Professional Qualifications ;
and having regard to the Article 2, second paragraph, part c , 3, first paragraph , 5 , 7, part c, below 3 ° , 11, first and second members , 12, second paragraph, part e , 17, second and third members , 18, 1st Member , 19 , 20, first and fifth member, part b , 23, third member , 24 , 25, second paragraph , 26, 6th paragraph , 29, first and second members , 30, second paragraph , 31 , 32 and 33, 1st paragraph, of the Inland Sea Decree ;
In agreement with the colleges of deputed states of Fryslân, Groningen and Overijssel for Article 10.4, first paragraph ;
as well as in accordance with the lectures of mayor and aldermen of Aalsmeer and Amsterdam for Article 10.4, second paragraph ;
Decision:
The following definitions shall apply:
competent authority: authority referred to in Article 9, second paragraph, of the Directive 2006 /87/EC or intended in Article 1.18 ;
Decision: Inland waterway decision ;
CBR: Central Office Driving licences in Rijswijk (Z-H);
Push-box ship which is intended for the carriage of goods, fit to be pushed and that:
1 °. Not equipped with own mechanical propellants;
2 °. is equipped with own mechanical propellants which are suitable for small distances only;
Push-push The assembly of vessels of which at least one is placed in the engine-driven ship which is used for the propulsion of the assembly, or for the two vessels with a power-driven train that serve the propulsion of the assembly. This means a push-set consisting of a push-and-pushed vessel, the couplings of which enable a controlled nocture;
coupled assembly: longitudinal composition of vessels attached to each other, none of which has been placed before the engine-driven ship which serves the propulsion of the assembly;
Attaches set of sets: a push set or a coupled assembly;
Minister: Minister for Infrastructure and the Environment;
Open excursion boat: Passenger ship having a length on the waterline of less than 20 metres and that:
a. is furnished and intended solely for the purposes of itinerating activities of a maximum duration not exceeding two hours;
b. does not have a closed buildup,
c. does not have an ongoing deck; and
d. is intended for use on inland waterways of zones 3 or 4;
Patrol vessel: ship to the extent used for the exercise of a public-law mission;
Directive 87 /540/EEC: Directive No 87 /540/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 9 November 1987 on admission to the occupation of carrier of national and international transport of goods by inland waterway and on the mutual recognition of this profession relating to inland waterway transport diplomas, certificates and other evidence of formal qualifications (PbEG L 322);
Directive 96 /50/EC: Directive No 96 /50/EC of the Council of the European Union of 23 July 1996 on the harmonization of the conditions for the issue of national boatmasters ' certificates for inland waterway vessels used in the carriage of goods and passengers in the Community (PbEU L 235);
Directive 2006 /87/EC: Directive No 2006 /87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of the European Union of 12 December 2006 laying down the technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Regulation Directive No 82 /714/EEC of the Council of the European Union (PbEU L 389);
Tour boat of the Amsterdam grachtentype: Passenger ship with a length on the waterline of less than 25 metres, as developed for the cruise ship in Amsterdam, and that:
a. one layer of passenger accommodation has, partly sunk to below the gangboard,
b. is provided with a largely continuous build up with large windows,
c. An open cockpit up to below the gangway may have a maximum of 25% of the length on the waterline;
d. has a steering position at the front of the passenger accommodation; and
e. is intended for use on inland waterways of zones 3 or 4;
RosR 1995: by resolution of 18 May 1994 (Protocol 1994-I-23) of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine Regulation of the vessels on the Rhine-1995 ;
Rsp: by resolution of 2 June 2010 (Protocol 2010-I-8) of the Central Commission for Rhine Navigation Rules governing shipping staff on the Rhine ;
Regulation (EEC) No 2919/85: Regulation (EEC) 2919/85 of the Council of the European Communities of 17 October 1985 laying down the conditions to be met in order to benefit from the regime reserved by the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine for the vessels of which the Navigation of the Rhine (PbEG L 280).
2 Where the term 'year' is used in this arrangement in relation to sailing time, the term 'year' is defined as 180 effective sailing days in inland navigation. Within a period of 365 consecutive days, a maximum of 180 days shall be taken into account as a period of course. 250 Cruise days in sea or coastal sea shipping or fishing as one year of sailing time.
Inland waterways are the waters situated in the Netherlands within the line of the Dutch coast, which runs from:
-the intersection of the latitude of latitude 53 ° 26 ' .5 N with the German coast on the spot of Upleward,
-hence to the point with coordinates 53 ° 26 '.5 N and 006 ° 55' .9 E,
-hence to a point located 25 meters west of the head of the strekdam of Borkum,
-hence via the northernmost points of Rottumeroog, Rottumerplaat and the sandplate Simonszand, to the eastern tip of Schiermonnikoog, and also along the northern coast to the west tip of Schiermonnikoog,
-hence to the northernmost point of the sandplate The Rif,
-hence to the easternmost point of Ameland and also along the northern coast to the most westerly point of this island,
-hence to the easternmost point of Terschelling and also along the northern coastline to the west most point of this island,
-then to the northernmost point of Vlieland and also along the northern coast to the most westerly point of this island,
-hence to the northernmost point of Texel and also along the western coast to the intersection of the coastline and the line between the Loodsmansduin on Texel, with coordinates 53 ° 01 '.3 N and 004 ° 43' .7 E, and the point with coordinates 52 ° 58 ' .4 N, 004 ° 39 ' .4 E on the island of Noorderhaaks,
-hence to the point with coordinates 52 ° 58 '.4 N and 004 ° 39' .4 e,
-hence to the North Holland coast at the height of the lighthouse Kijkduin near Den Helder and along the coast of the North and South Holland, within which are understood the heads of IJmuiden, Scheveningen and Hoek van Holland, up to the Haringvlietdam,
-hence along the sea side of this dam and the sea side of the outside port of Stellendam, to Goeree and also along the western coast of this to the Brouwersdam,
-hence along the sea side of this dam to Schouwen and also along the western coast from this to the fence in the Oosterschelde,
-hence along the sea side of this closure, over the port heads of the Vairport Neeltje Jans and the North Sea outport (Roompotsluis), to Northern Beveland and also along the coastline to the Veersedam,
-hence along the sea side of this dam to Walcheren and along the western coast of this to the light stand of the Nolle, with coordinates 51 ° 26 '.9 N and 003 ° 33' .1 E, near Vlissingen,
-hence to the light-up New Sluis, with coordinates 51 ° 24 '.4 N and 003 ° 31' .3 E, in Zcentury-Flanders and along the north-west coast of this to the point of border crossing between the Netherlands and Belgium.
The zones specified in Article 2 of the Act are:
a. Zones 2, 3 and 4 listed in Annex I to Directive 2006 /87/EC ;
(b) the zone R comprising inland waterways referred to in subparagraph (a) for which a certificate is issued in accordance with Article 22 of the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine, in accordance with the wording of that Article to the entry into force of the said Agreement; the law .
1 Without prejudice to the provisions of the Rsp as regards applications for Rhine patents and Radarpatents to apply for an application under the Law the means of applications required by the issuing authority shall be applied.
2 The issuing body referred to in paragraph 1 may provide a certified copy for a document which has been lost or which has been invalidated by the wear and tear, which replaces the original document.
1 The obligation to retain on board documents issued pursuant to or under the terms of the Law , shall not apply to the following vessels:
a. Bogs;
b. cranes;
c. bagger mills;
d. Hopperpistons;
e. elevators;
f. non-resident vessels, such as pusher-boxes, deckouts, pontons;
g. open excursion boats, except in respect of the obligation with respect to the boatproof and provided that the certificate of on-the-spot examination of which the tour begins is present;
h. inland waterway vessels Article 785, second paragraph, of book 8 of the Civil Code no obligation of testing exists, except for motor boats as intended in Article 16 (d) of the Decision with regard to the obligation with regard to the boatmasters ' certificate.
2 The exemption for the ships referred to in paragraph 1 (f) shall apply only if:
a. The ship has a metal plate bearing the certificate number, the zone, or any of the areas for which the certificate of investigation is valid, and the date of validity of the certificate;
(b) the entries referred to in subparagraph (a), in good legible letters and figures with a depth of not less than 6 mm, have been cut and the metal plate, provided for in subparagraph (a), has a height of not less than 60 mm and of a length of at least 120 mm and The rear ship on the starboard side is secured in a properly visible position;
c. The correspondence between the entries on the plate and the notes in the certificate has been confirmed by an official of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate through the affixing of a stamp on the plate;
d. when the ship is used on the inland waterways in the Netherlands, the certificate is in custody at the owner of the ship; and
e. at the border crossing, the ship's certificate shall be on board the ship which is moving the push, coupled assembly or the drag.
1 For the Rhine in the Netherlands including the Waal and the Lek, it is in effect RosR 1995 with the corresponding annexes, which is included in Annex 1.1 In this arrangement, it is cited as: the rules of the Rhine-1995 survey of vessels.
2 In applying the provisions of the first paragraph, the committee of experts shall act as follows: Article 1.19 , in accordance with the instructions of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine relating to the application of the Convention RosR 1995 .
The Minister shall publish the instructions provided for in the second paragraph of the Official Journal.
1 The commander of a vessel which navigates the Rhine is responsible for compliance with the Articles 1.03 to 1.05 , from the Chapters 3 to 22 , except the Articles 8.07 (3) , 9.07, third member , 12.01, third and fourth members , 14.15, second and third members , 15.05, 1st Member , and 16.06, 1st Member, of the RosR 1995 and of the Articles 2.02, first paragraph, second paragraph, third subparagraph, and third member , 3.01 , 3.02 , 3.03 , 3.04 , 3.06, second, third and sixth Member States , 3.05, first paragraph, part a , 3.10 , 3.11, first, second and third members , 3.12 and 3.13, first, third, fourth and fifth member, from the Rsp .
2 The owner of a vessel that navigates the Rhine is responsible for compliance with the Articles 1.03 to 1.05 , 2.08, 1st Member , 2.09, 1st Member , from the Chapters 3 to 22 , except the Articles 8.07 (3) , 9.07, third member , 12.01, third and fourth members , 14.15, second and third members , 15.05, 1st Member , and 16.06, 1st Member, of the RosR 1995 and from Article 3.14, first paragraph, of the Rsp .
3 The employer of the crew of a ship which navigates the Rhine is responsible for compliance with the Articles 2.02, first paragraph, second paragraph, third subparagraph, and third member , 3.01 , 3.02 , 3.03 , 3.04 , 3.06, second, third and sixth Member States , 3.05, first paragraph, part a , 3.10 , 3.11, first to third members , 3.12 and 3.13, first, third, fourth and fifth member, from the Rsp .
4 A member of the crew of a ship that navigates the Rhine, not being the commander, is responsible for compliance with the Articles 3.04 , 3.05, first paragraph, part b and second member and 3.06, 2nd, 3rd and 4th member, from the Rsp .
5 The provisions of paragraphs 1 to 4 of this Article shall apply mutatis mutandis to the provisions of Article 1.06 of the RosR 1995 or Article 1.02 of the Rsp temporary derogations.
On the approval and installation of a tachograph as referred to in Article 3.10, third paragraph, of Annex 1.9 is Annex A3 of Rsp applicable, and Annex 1.4 .
1 For the Rhine in the Netherlands including the Waal and the Lek, it is in effect Rsp , including its annexes, which is included in the Annex 1.9 .
2 Without prejudice to the first paragraph, on the Rhine in the Netherlands, including the Waal and the Lek, shall apply:
a. Chapter 7, paragraphs 1 and 2 ;
b. provided that during the voyage the German-Dutch border is not exceeded in one direction or the other:
1 °. the competence requirements specified in Article 2.9 ;
2 °. the description of seagoing vessels Article 5.10 ;
3 °. the exemptions provided for in Chapter 5, Section 5 ;
4 °. the rest periods specified in the Working Time Decision Transport, Chapter 5 Inland navigation.
Instead of a patent as intended in Article 6.02, third paragraph, part b, of the Rsp listed in Annex 1.9 , it is sufficient for the Rhine to sail downstream from the Spijksche Veer, including the Waal and the Lek:
a. A small boatmasters ' certificate;
b. a consequence of Article 7.11 a certificate of proficiency approved; or
c. A Military certificate, valid for driving a small army vessel on rivers, canals and lakes, issued by the Genie Training Centre.
1 With the radar patent provided for in Article 6.04, second paragraph, of the Rsp shall be treated as
a. the radar diploma for the Rhine issued under the Decision of the Regulation on radar patents as applied until the entry into force of the Decision of the Rhine Patent Regulation ;
The radar diploma for the Rhine issued under the Royal Decree of 29 December 1965 on the entry into force of the Rhine in the Netherlands of the Rules of Procedure relating to the granting of diplomas for the conduct of a vessel of radar on the Rhine (Stb. 660), as it applied until the entry into force of the Rule of the Rules of Procedure Radar patents ;
(c) the radar diploma in inland waterway transport issued under the Navigation Radar Certificate, as it applied until the entry into force of the Radar patent system inland navigation system ;
d. the radar diploma in the Rhine and inland waterway transport referred to in Article 17 (b) of the Radar Diploma Scheme, as applied until the entry into force of the Radar patent system inland navigation system ;
(e) Radar-brevet issued under the Royal Decree establishing a radar system and amending the Royal Decree of 22 April 1988 on the master of the master of dredging of the vessel and of the brevet of the steering man for the purpose of the dredging of 15 October 1993 (Belgian Official Gazette, 2757).
2 With the radar patent referred to in Article 6.04, second paragraph, of the Rsp , for the purpose of sailing on the ship's two ships, shall be: Article 4.06, third and fourth member, of the Inland waterway police , assimilated:
a. Diplomas awarded in accordance with the Law on Marine Navigation, with the exception of the diploma of the seagoing board and the small commercial operation of the pilot-mate of the steering wheel;
(b) evidence of radar observer's licence and the certificate of competence of radar navigator in order to obtain the diploma referred to in subparagraph (a);
(c) the licence issued pursuant to Annex II/2, II/3 and II/4 of the Convention on Standards of Training, Certification and Watchkeeping for Seafarers concluded in London on 7 July 1978 (Trb). 1981, 144);
d. The Radar Diploma Wide Waters, issued by the Foundation Royal Education Fund for Shipping.
3 As equivalent exam evidence, as intended Article 8.04, third paragraph, of the Rsp , are recognized the following diplomas with the codification of the Central Register Vocational Training, which is intended to be Article 6.4.1, first paragraph, of the Vocational Education Act :
a. The pilot/skipper diploma, with codings 10651, 91900, 95630 or 25510, or the documentary evidence that the radar component of this training has been successfully completed;
b. The diploma of master, with codings 10650, 93110, 95640 or 25511, or the documentary evidence that the radar component of this training has been successfully completed.
The examinations for obtaining a radar patent shall be conducted in accordance with an examination procedure and an examination programme approved by the Minister.
1 For the Rhine in the Netherlands, including the Waal and the Lek, the colour, the strength of the lamps, and the approval of the navigation lanterns comply with the requirements of Directive 2006 /87/EC.
2 Navigation lanterns approved in accordance with the provisions of Article 5 (1) of the Directive on the Navigation of the Rhine (Stb. 389), the provisions referred to in paragraph 1 shall be deemed to have been adopted in accordance with the rules referred to in the first paragraph of this Article.
Types of radar equipment approved for the navigation of the Rhine subject to the resolution of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine of 23 April 1969 (Protocol 1969-II-18) shall no longer be built into a vessel as from 1 January 2000. If the approval has been made before 1 January 1990, the use of these radar equipment shall be permitted on board a ship until 1 January 2010 if a valid declaration on the construction and functioning of a ship is present.
Types of rate-of-turn indicators approved for the navigation of the Rhine subject to the resolution of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine of 23 April 1969 (Protocol 1969-II-18) shall no longer be built into a vessel as from 1 January 2000. If the approval has been made before 1 January 1990, the use of these rate-of-turn indicators shall be permitted on board a ship until 1 January 2010 if a valid declaration on the construction and functioning of a ship is present.
1 The construction or replacement, as well as repair and maintenance of radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall be carried out only by holdings, which have been approved by the competent authority.
2 The approval may be attached to a period to be determined by the competent authority and may be withdrawn by such approval if the conditions of verification provided for in Annex M, Parts I and II, of the RosR 1995 no longer fulfilled.
The competent authority shall communicate to the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine, by way of change, which holdings are approved.
The Inland ECDIS equipment in the information mode, the corresponding visualization system and the electronic inland maps must be given to the Annex 1.10 Meet minimum requirements.
1 The competent authority within the meaning of the in Articles 1.6 , 1.9 and 1.14 These regulations are the Minister.
2 By way of derogation from the first paragraph, the competent authority shall be in the RosR 1995 :
a. the Director-General for Aviation and Maritime Affairs in Article 2.18 ;
b. the chairman of the committee of experts in the Articles 2.11, first paragraph , 2.12, second paragraph , 2.19, second paragraph , 8a.01 , 8a.02, 8th Member , 8a.03, first and second members , 8a.04, first, second, fourth and fifth members , 8a.05, first, second and third members , 8a.06, third member , 8a.08, first, third and fourth members , 8a.09 , 8a.10, first, second and third members , 8a.11, 1st Member , 8a.12, first paragraph, introductory wording and part b , 15.09, third member , 20.01, fifth paragraph, point (h) , and 22a.04, third member ;
(c) the Chief Inspector Directors of the Directorate-General for the Rijkswaterstaat Oost-Netherlands and South Holland, in so far as they are concerned, in the Articles 2.11, first paragraph , 5.03, first paragraph , 18.01 ;
d. the Inspector General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate in the Articles 23.03, fourth paragraph , 23.04, 1st and 2nd Member , 23.08, 2nd and 4th Member ;
e. the officials referred to in Article 141 of the Code of Criminal Procedure in the Articles 2.11, first paragraph and 23.03, fourth paragraph .
3 By way of derogation from the first paragraph, the competent authority shall be in the Rsp :
a. the Inspector General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate in the Articles 3.06, 1st paragraph , 5.02, part a , 5.03, introductory wording , 5.04, first paragraph , and 5.08, first to third members ;
b. the in Article 10.2 designated officials as well as police officers referred to in Article 2 (a) of the Polition Act 2012 in Article 2.26, first paragraph;
c. the chairman of the committee of experts in Article 3.13, second and fourth paragraphs ;
d. the Road Traffic Service in Annex A3, Part B, point (1) of the Rsp .
4 The competent authorities referred to in paragraphs 1 and 3 shall conduct the Rsp out in accordance with the instructions given by the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine concerning the application of the Rules of Procedure.
5 The minister shall publish the service instructions referred to in paragraph 4 in the Official Gazette.
1 There is a committee of experts.
2 This committee is part of:
a. as experts: the officials of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate who are responsible for the examination of ships and the issuing of research certificates, as well as the chief engineer-Director of the East Netherlands Directorate-General of the Directorate-General for Rijkswaterstaat
b. As an expert, exclusively responsible for issuing certificates for the navigation of the Rhine and the declarations accompanying them: the Chief Inspector General of the Monitoring Unit Inland Navigation of the Environment and Transport Inspection Unit;
c. as Chairman: the Inspector General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate;
d. as Deputy Chairman, the Deputy Inspector General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate.
(3) A decision taken by the chairman or expert of the commission shall be treated as a decision taken by the committee of experts.
1 There is a technical commission for the duration of five years.
2 Of this Committee, as a member, the following are part of:
(a) representatives of the classification societies recognised as such by the Commission of the European Communities or the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine;
Representatives of other inspection bodies commissioned by the Minister for the examination of ships;
c. a representative of the Board of Inland Navigation of the Consultation Bodies Traffic and Water State.
3 This committee is chaired by the Inspector-General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate.
4 The method of operation of this Commission is specified in a regulation of procedure adopted by the Minister.
In the case of commercial transport of goods and persons between two points situated on inland waterways as referred to in Article 4 (1) of the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine, the Navigation of the Rhine, as referred to in Article 4 (2) of the Convention, shall be: Article 2, first paragraph, of the Decision or a certified copy thereof, as intended Article 1.4, second paragraph , on board the ship for which it was issued.
A change of Directive 2006 /87/EC the application of this scheme shall apply from the date of implementation of the relevant amending Directive, or where a modification referred to in Annex II, Article 1.06 of the Directive enters into force, unless otherwise provided by: A decision of a ministerial order to be published in the Official Gazette will be held at a different time.
Article 6, first paragraph, of the Act shall not apply to:
(a) carriage with inland waterway vessels of a load capacity not exceeding 200 metric tonnes;
b. Transport of:
1 °. baggage of travellers with inland waterway vessels used for the transport of persons;
2 °. goods belonging to the equipment or equipment of the IWC vessel, to which they are transported; or
3 ° goods belonging to the carrier, provided that the total weight of the goods does not exceed 25 000 kg and the goods are intended for their own use.
The professional competence of the Article 6, first paragraph, of the Act , it shall be demonstrated by:
a. the following diplomas:
1 °. the professional diploma Entrepreneur in the inland navigation of the CBR,
2 °. the diploma in the Rhine-Rhine and Inland waterways diploma,
3 °. the diploma in Captain Inland waterways level 3 or level 4, as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational Training with codes 10650, 93110 or 95640;
b. On the basis of Article 11, first paragraph, of the Inland Transport Act a licence issued for the commercial transport of goods; or
c. the piece of evidence intended to Article 2.4, second paragraph .
For examinations in order to obtain a diploma in accordance with Article 2.2 (a) , an examination procedure approved by the Minister shall apply.
1 Natural persons who prove to be before the time, referred to in Article 5 of Directive 87 /540/EEC , in a Member State or other State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, the occupation of carrier of goods by inland waterway carrier of national or international transport has been legally exercised, comply with the requirements of the the requirement of professional competence and the receipt of the Minister for application on an appropriate piece of evidence.
2 As evidence of professional competence referred to in paragraph 1, the document shall be drawn up in accordance with the model in accordance with the model Annex 2.1 This scheme.
1 To the requirement of professional competence as referred to in Article 6, first paragraph, of the Act , it is not necessary to comply for one year by:
a. the heir or, if there are more heirs, joint heirs of the deceased holder of a certificate of competency;
b. One, by or on behalf of the holder of a certificate of competence, authorised in the event of physical incapacity or legal incompetence of the holder of a certificate of competence.
2 The period referred to in the first paragraph of the first paragraph shall begin on the day of the place of a circumstance referred to in paragraph 1 (a) or (b). On application, the Minister may, in special cases, extend that time limit by a maximum of 26 weeks.
Upon application, the Minister may grant a waiver as referred to in Article 6 (5) of the Law to a person who has demonstrably had at least three years ' practical experience in the day-to-day management of the undertaking concerned, if there is a special case referred to in Article 4, second paragraph, of Directive 87 /540/EEC .
The holder of a certificate of competence shall ensure that this certificate can be verified in any of the following ways:
a. At the premises of the owner or the operator of the IWB vessel; or
b. on the basis of the data from the trade register provided for in Article 2 of the Commercial Registry Act 2007 .
A change of Directive 87 /540/EEC is for the application of the Article 2.4 and 2.6 shall apply from the date of implementation of the amending Directive concerned, unless a time of time is laid down by ministerial decree published in the Official Journal.
1 This Article shall apply to the crew members of ships as referred to in Article 12 of the Decision , not being ferries, ferring on the in Article 1.2 in the case of such inland waters, provided that during the voyage the German-Dutch border on the Rhine at the Spijksche Veer is not exceeded in one direction or another.
2 A skipper is:
a. In possession of a major patent as intended in the Rsp or any Article 9.02, paragraph 1 of that Regulation valid Rhine-Rhine-spatent;
b. In possession of a boatproof as intended Article 25, first paragraph, of the Act ;
c. in possession of a document as referred to in Article 25, third paragraph, of the Act ; or
d. under Article 31 of the Act exempt or exempt from the obligation in possession of a large boatmasters ' certificate as referred to in Article 25, first paragraph, of the Act , provided that the rules or restrictions attached to the exemption or waiver are complied with by him.
3 A mate:
a. is in possession of a limited large sailing certificate or meets the requirements of Seaman, and
b. has an occupational experience of at least two years ' time as a sailor in inland navigation.
4 A driver is:
a. for at least 18 years and in possession of a maritime diploma as listed in the Central Register of Vocational Training under the numbers 91943, 91941, 91931 or 91932, or in possession of a recognition of professional qualifications as intended for the purposes of the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications ; or
b. at least 19 years and meet the requirements of sailor-engine floats and has an occupational experience of at least two years sailing time as a sailor-motor driver on a ship with mechanical propellants.
5 A full-sailor meets the requirements of a sailor and has a professional experience of at least one year of sailing time as a sailor in the inland navigation.
6 A sailor-engine driver shall comply:
a. To the requirements of Seaman and is in possession of:
1 °. The diploma of the motor driver of the Royal Education Fund for Shipping,
2 °. The diploma of master, mate-skipper or boatman, as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational training under the respective numbers 10650, 25511, 93110, 95640, 10651, 25510, 91900, 95630, 10653, 25512 and 93030,
3 °. a maritime diploma as listed in the Central Register Vocational training under the numbers 25513, 25515, 25516, 25518, 91943, 91941, 91931 or 91932, or
4. a recognition of professional qualifications as intended for use in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications ; or
b. To the requirements of sailor and has a professional experience of at least one year of sailing time as a sailor on a ship with mechanical propellants, and possesses a demonstrable basic knowledge in the field of motors.
7 A sailor is:
a. At least 17 years and in the possession of:
1 °. diploma in seaman's inland navigation, as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational Training with codes 10652, 91880 to 91882 and 95620,
2 °. The diploma of master, mate-skipper or boatman, as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational training under the respective numbers 10650, 25511, 93110, 95640, 10651, 25510, 91900, 95630, 10653, 25512 and 93030,
3 °. The diploma of VMBO Rhine, indoor and coastal shipping of the Shipping and Transport College in Rotterdam, the Maritime College Velsen at IJmuiden, the Maritime Academy Harlingen at Harlingen or the Mondial College in Nijmegen, or
4. a recognition of professional qualifications as intended for use in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications ; or
b. At least 19 years and:
1. has a professional experience of at least three years ' time as a member of a deck crew, of which at least one year shall be in the inland navigation area and two years in either the inland navigation, maritime, coastal or fisheries sector;
2. is in the possession of the certificate of seaman's practical examination, in order to ensure that the practical examination of the Seaman's Inland Navigation of the CBR has been completed by a good result; or
3 °. is in the possession of:
a. A diploma of prospective skipper issued by the CBR;
b. A statement by the CBR that Case Test 1 of the Master of Practice Proficiency Exam referred to in Article 7.19a has been carried out with good effect; and
c. Evidence that a minimum of 60 days of sailing time has been constructed.
8 A light rose is:
a. at least 15 years, and
b. In possession of a learning contract which provides for the course to be written or verbally followed by the course aspiring skipper of the Shipping and Transport College in Rotterdam, the Noorderpoort College in Groningen or the ROC NOVA college in Haarlem, or a course recognised by a competent authority in an overseas country leading to an equivalent diploma.
9 A deksman is at least 16 years.
1 For ferry crew members, this Article shall apply.
2 A skipper:
a. shall be at least 21 years,
b. meets the requirements applicable under Article 2.9 (2) (a) (a) to (c) , shall be placed on a skipper; and
c. is in possession of:
1 °. a certificate showing that he has followed the short training skipper-driver with limited working area or other training approved by the Minister and the training of Zoute Veren, nautical module,
2. a foreign certificate recognised by the Minister to show that he has received equivalent training; or
3 °. a recognition of professional qualifications as intended for use in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications .
3 A mate:
a. shall be at least 21 years,
b. meets the requirements applicable under Article 2.9 (2) (a) (a) to (c) , shall be placed on a skipper; and
c. is in possession of one approved by the Minister:
1 °. Certificate showing that he has successfully followed an E.H.B. O. training; or
2. Foreign certificate showing that he has received equivalent training.
4 An initial driver shall be at least 21 years of age and shall be in possession of:
a. A certificate showing that he has followed with good results:
1 °. the training MTS construction work and the "Zoute Veren" training, technical module,
2 °. The "Machinist Inland Navigation" training supplemented by the "Zoute Veren" training, technical module, or
3 °. another training approved by the Minister;
b. A foreign certificate recognised by the Minister demonstrating that he has received equivalent training; or
(c) a recognition of professional qualifications as defined in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications .
5 A second driver shall be at least 19 years of age and shall be in possession of:
a certificate attestation that he has successfully followed the train driving train driver B, or another training approved by the Minister;
b. A foreign certificate recognised by the Minister demonstrating that he has received equivalent training; or
(c) a recognition of professional qualifications as defined in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications .
6 A sailor shall be at least 19 years of age and shall be in possession of:
a. A certificate recognised by the Minister certifying that he has been responsible for training in the fight against fire;
b. A foreign certificate recognised by the Minister demonstrating that he has received equivalent training; or
(c) a recognition of professional qualifications as defined in the General law on recognition of EU professional qualifications .
7 A ray of light shall be at least 18 years and shall be in possession of a certificate recognised by the Minister to show that he has been responsible for the fight against fire, or of a foreign minister recognised by the Minister. a certificate showing that he has received an equivalent degree of training.
8 For the examinations to obtain the Zoute Veren Nautical Module or Technical Module diplomas referred to in paragraph 2 (c) (1) and the fourth paragraph, part (a) (1 ° and 2 °), an examination procedure approved by the Minister shall be adopted by the Minister. date of application of the examination programme.
The ability to carry a function on board may be demonstrated at any time:
a. By the skipper by means of the sailing certificate; or
b. by the other members of the crew by means of the handbook provided in Article 5.11 .
1 Document on the evaluation of an application for the recognition of professional qualifications of a migrant worker for the purposes of the occupation of the driver, driver inland waterway transport, seaman, dandelier, full-scale and sailor-engine established the service book, intended in Article 5.11 .
2 On a service provider as referred to in Article 21 of the General Act on recognition of EU professional qualifications wishing to apply for seaman, sailor-engine floorboard, full sailor or mate inland navigation in the Netherlands, the first paragraph shall apply.
For the purposes of this chapter and of the Annexes thereto, the following definitions shall apply:
Amsterdamse dekschuit: Tow-cargo ship which is only capable of being moved behind a sledding ship at short distance by means of cross-wires, or to be accompanied by longitudinal coupling, and that:
a. At the top of the surface by a continuous watertight deck, it is closed;
b. Has a length of not more than 40 m; and
c. Not fitted with quarters, machinery spaces or boiler rooms;
Non-detached spring pont: a ferry which is bound by cables, chains or otherwise to a particular fairway during navigation;
skûtsje: sailing passenger ship:
a. Of a length not exceeding 22 m and of a width not exceeding 4 m;
b. that was built before 1950; and
c. having retained the characteristics of the previous destination as a cargo ship and whose carrying capacity was not more than 55 tonnes.
1 Inland vessels as intended Article 6 of the Decision which are used in zones 2, 3 and 4, comply with the technical requirements of Annex II to this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC .
2 For the purposes of this Article, the Minister shall act in accordance with the administrative instructions set out in Annex II, Article 1.07 of Directive 2006 /87/EC have been established.
Without prejudice Article 3.2, first paragraph , passenger ships in the zone 2 meet the technical requirements, mentioned in Annex 3.1 .
1 By way of derogation from Article 3.2, first paragraph , the minimum speed to be achieved in relation to the water shall be equal to or greater than 86 metres at least:
a. 11 km/h in zone 3 waters;
b. 10 km/h in zone 4 waters, unless there is a maximum speed of less than 10 km/h. In this case, the minister shall determine at least the minimum speed to be achieved for the said push-forward.
2 By way of derogation from Article 3.2, first paragraph , it is permissible to use a push-head, with a length of up to 86 metres and from a push-point, on the zones three and four without heats and suffice to do so with the requirements of Article 10.01, first paragraph, of Directive 2006 /87/EC Boeganchors.
3 Article 3.2 shall not apply to:
a. Amsterdam covers provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.2 ;
b. excursion boats of the Amsterdam grachtant type, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of the Amsterdam Annex 3.3 ;
c. open excursion boats, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.4 ;
d. skûtsjes, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.5 ;
e. Ferries, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.6 ;
f. Ferries, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.7 ;
g. bunker stations, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.8 ;
h. Patrolling vessels, provided that they comply with the technical requirements of Annex 3.9 .
1 Without prejudice Article 1.6, first paragraph , inland waterway vessels in the R & D area may also comply with the technical requirements referred to in Annex II of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC Subject to the transitional provisions of Chapter 24 of Annex II to this Regulation, to the extent that the Community certificate issued or renewed after 30 December 2008 is concerned with the full conformity of the vessel, without prejudice to the transitional provisions of Chapter 24 of Annex II to this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC , with the technical requirements of the same Annex II, for which the equivalence with the technical requirements laid down in or under the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine has been established in accordance with the applicable rules and procedures.
2 When application of the first paragraph Paragraph 2 of this Chapter applicable mutatis mutandis.
1 For inland vessels of which the keel has been laid on 30 December 2008 or later, the Minister shall issue the certificate of inquiry, if, after technical examination for the entry into service of the vessel, it has been shown that it complies with the requirements of the requirements of Annex II of the Directive 2006 /87/EC .
2 For inland vessels the keel of which has been laid before 30 December 2008, the minister's certificate of examination shall be issued if it complies with the requirements of Annex II of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC , subject to the transitional provisions applicable to the inland waterway vessel.
3 In the case of the technical examination referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2, or in the case of a technical examination commissioned by the owner, it shall be verified that the vessel complies with the requirements of the Article 3.4 .
4 If a certificate issued by an approved classification agency indicates that an IWB vessel fully or partially complies with the requirements set out in Annex II to this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC or in the annexes attached to this Arrangement, the Minister may waive all or part of an investigation.
For inland waterway vessels referred to in Article 6 (a) to (d) and (g) and (j) of the Decision The certificate of inquiry shall be issued as Community inland navigation certificate.
1 The application of a certificate of inquiry shall be submitted by the owner of the IWC vessel.
2 In the application, the drawings of the building and the interior of the IWC vessel and, where there are specific reasons for its judgment, shall be the arithmetical proof of the strength of the hull.
3 If the interior ship has been examined by or is built under the supervision of one based on Article 14 of the Act designated classification society, the declaration of that office shall also be submitted for the examination or construction.
4 If under the conditions of Articles 3.14 or 3.15 The test shall be subject to the presentation of a loading test, the results of that test, as well as the data relating to the stability of the inland waterway vessel in the case of different loading conditions.
1 The examination certificate, the provisional certificate of examination, the Community certificate of inland navigation, the provisional Community certificate, and the Community supplementary inland navigation certificate, in connection with a certificate of origin, The certificate of inquiry referred to in the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine shall be valid for the purpose of the destination and for the zones in respect of which the vessel has been found to be fit to be certified.
2 The Community certificate of inland navigation referred to in Article 8 of the Decision , shall be issued by the Minister in accordance with the model set out in Annex V, Part I, to: Directive 2006 /87/EC .
3 The Community supplementary inland navigation certificate, referred to in Article 9 of the Decision shall be issued by the Minister in accordance with the model set out in Annex V, Part II, to Directive 2006 /87/EC .
4 The preliminary examination certificate provided for in Article 10 of the Decision , shall be issued by the Minister in accordance with the model set out in Annex V, Part III, to: Directive 2006 /87/EC .
5 The certificate of inquiry, as referred to in Article 7 of the Act , shall, for the ships specified in Article 3.4 , issued by the Minister in accordance with the model set out in Annex V, Part I, of Directive 2006 /87/EC .
6 The certificate of inquiry referred to in Article 7 of the Act , shall be issued by the Minister for bunker stations in accordance with the model in the Annex to this Regulation. Annex 3.10 .
7 The Certificate of Investigation referred to in the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine is issued by the Minister according to the model of Annex B to the RosR 1995 .
The provisional Community inland navigation certificate referred to in Article 10 of the Decision It shall be issued when the soundness of the inland waterway vessel, the floating device, or the floating object of the vessel is deemed to be sufficient to ensure adequate navigation.
1 The period of validity of the Community certificate of inland navigation, the supplementary Community certificate of inland navigation and the certificate of research shall be for new ships:
a. Five years for passenger ships;
b. 10 years for other inland waterway vessels.
2 The period of validity shall be entered in the certificate.
For inland waterway vessels already in operation prior to the examination, the Minister shall determine the period of validity of the certificate separately, depending on the results of the investigation, but shall not exceed the period of validity of that examination in the first paragraph.
The Minister shall keep in accordance with Annex VI of Directive 2006 /87/EC a register of all the certificates of investigation issued by him under this paragraph.
1 The certificate of inquiry shall indicate the unique European ship identification number assigned by the competent authority of the Member State in which the place of booking or the home port of the IWC vessel is located.
2 In ships which do not come from one of the Member States of the European Union, the Minister shall assign the unique European ship identification number.
3 The owner of the IWC vessel shall affertify and remove the ship identification number specified in the survey certificate, as soon as it has become invalid.
4 This Article shall not apply to pleasure craft.
1 An inland waterway vessel to be examined shall be unladen, cleaned and equipped with the required equipment.
2 The committee of experts will visit the vessel in an initial examination of the dry matter. This may be omitted if a declaration by an approved classification society, according to which the construction complies with the rules used as a result, is presented, or if a certificate is produced showing that the minister has already For other purposes a visit on the dry has been carried out. In periodic examinations or investigations according to Article 3.16 The committee of experts can see a visit to the dry demand.
3 In the first examination of motor vessels and assemblies, as well as essential changes in the propelling plant or steering system, the committee of experts shall carry out a pilot operation.
4 The committee of experts may, at the same time during construction, carry out additional visits and pilot projects and require further proof.
5 The owner of the interior ship provides further cooperation to the investigation, including by facilitating access to the parts of the fuselage and to the installations, which are not or are difficult to access or visible, by personnel to make available or to carry out pilot projects.
1 For the purpose of assessing the stability of a passenger ship, a ferry or a sailing passenger ship, the vessel shall be subjected to a lifting test in the case of a first investigation.
2 If the results of the lifting test of a sistership of a passenger ship, a ferry or a sailing passenger ship are available and sufficient stability data can be obtained from it, the Minister may permit a hellingtest shall be omitted.
For the purposes of assessing the stability of ships other than those referred to in paragraph 1, the Minister may provide that a lifting test shall be carried out if the establishment or the particular destination of the ship gives rise to this test.
4 The lifting test shall be carried out by or on behalf of the owner in the presence of the committee of experts, except in the case of vessels of a length equal to or greater than 25 metres.
5 In the case of passenger ships of a length on the waterline not exceeding 25 metres, sufficient stability may be demonstrated by carrying out a stability test of the weight of half of the authorised number of persons, at the worst The filling of the fuel and drinking water tanks.
6 In the stability test referred to in paragraph 5, the weight of half of the number of persons authorized shall be moved to the ship's side by the part of the deck intended for passengers and 3,75 density in that part; persons per square metre, corresponding to 285 kg per square metre, is obtained.
7 In the case of weight referred to in paragraph 6 (6), the heel shall not exceed 7 degrees after moving. The remaining freeboard and the remaining safety distance shall not be less than 0,05 times the width on the waterline plus 0,20 metres and 0,05 times the width on the waterline plus 0,10 metres.
1 Where, as a result of circumstances such as: Article 15, first paragraph, of the Act an investigation is carried out as intended that Article this includes an examination of the construction, the tools and equipment of the IWC vessel, to the extent that they are involved in the damage, repair, alteration, alteration, or defects. Stability can also be assessed.
2 If it concerns an examination of a passenger ship, a ferry or a sailing passenger ship, the Minister may determine that a lifting test shall be conducted.
(3) If the examination is different from the vessels mentioned in the second paragraph, Article 3.15, third paragraph , mutatis mutandis.
4 If after an examination as referred to in the first member, the inner ship to the at or under Article 8 of the Act The Minister shall issue a new certificate of inquiry or extend the validity of the certificate.
If a certificate of inquiry has been issued by the Minister, the owner shall share any change in the name, transfer of ownership, any remeasurement of an inland waterway vessel, and any change to the unique European ship identification number, of the testing position or the home port to the Minister. He shall submit the research certificate for amendment thereto.
1 Before the expiry of the validity of the certificate of inquiry, an internal vessel may be subject to periodic examination.
2 The new period of validity of the examination certificate shall be determined, depending on the results of the examination provided for in paragraph 1. The period of validity shall be entered in the certificate and shall be notified to the competent authority which issued it.
3 If, instead of an extension of the validity period referred to in paragraph 2, the certificate of examination is replaced by a new one, the old certificate shall be returned to the competent authority which issued it.
4 In exceptional cases, the Minister may, on a reasoned request, decide to extend the period of validity of the certificate of inquiry which he has issued without examination for a period not exceeding six months. This extension shall be stated in the certificate.
1 The minister also examines ships not under the scope of Directive 2006 /87/EC or of the RosR 1995 If they are presented for research.
2 If the survey referred to in paragraph 1 shows that the ship complies with Directive 2006 /87/EC or to the RosR 1995 , the Minister will issue a certificate of inquiry.
1 As Annex II of Directive 2006 /87/EC determines that certain materials, equipment or equipment are to be used or to be on board on an internal ship, or that certain structural measures have to be taken or certain setings to be held, may allow the application or presence on board of this IWC vessel of any other material, equipment or equipment, or permit other construction measures to be taken or other setings to be taken. held in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19, second paragraph, of the Directive have been recognised as equivalent.
2 As long as the Committee referred to in Article 19, first paragraph of Directive 2006 /87/EC In the context of the procedure provided for in Article 19 (2) of that Directive, no recommendation on equivalence has been made in accordance with paragraph 1, the Minister may issue a provisional Community inland navigation certificate.
3 Within one month of the issue of the provisional Community certificate, in accordance with Article 2.05 (g) of Annex II to this Regulation, Directive 2006 /87/EC In accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 19 (2) of that Directive, the Minister, acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 19 (2) of that Directive, shall inform the Committee of the nature of the European vessel of the nature of the ship, and the unique European ship identification number of the IWC vessel. derogation and from the country where the internal vessel is tebued or in which its home port is situated.
4 By way of trial and for a limited period of time, the Minister may, on the basis of a recommendation from the Committee referred to in paragraph 2 of the second paragraph, apply to Directive 2006 /87/EC for an inland waterway vessel with new technical provisions derogating from the provisions of Annex II, to issue a Community inland navigation certificate in so far as these new facilities offer equivalent safety.
1 For passenger ships and sailing passenger ships for the zone 2 situated in the Netherlands, the Minister for the application of Article 7 (c) of the Decision , ships ' licences issued on the basis of Directive No 76 /135/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 20 January 1976 on the reciprocal recognition of navigability licences for inland waterway vessels (PbEG L 21), if the ship also complies with the relevant rules for Zone 2.
2 The first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to ferries, except that the approval for zone 2 shall apply only if the ferry also complies with the requirements of the Annex 3.7 .
1 The minister may apply for the application of Article 7 (c) of the Decision , a document which is issued by a competent authority of another State other than a Member State of the European Union or any of the other States Parties to the Agreement on the European Economic Area has been issued (vii) method of appropriateness of a ship's standing office.
2 Recognition of the document of soundness referred to in paragraph 1 shall be recognised if the Minister considers that sufficient guarantee is given to the soundness of the ship.
3 The document of soundness shall be recognised for the inland waterways of zones 2, 3 or 4 situated in the Netherlands if, in the opinion of the Minister, the document provides sufficient guarantees for the safety of navigation on those waters.
4 The recognition may relate to a single document of soundness or to a group of equal documents.
The certificate for passenger ships, ferries, patrol vessels, sailing passenger ships or bunker stations shall be treated in the same way as a document of soundness issued by an independent inspection body in another Member State, in the European Union or in a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, issued on the basis of research which meets at least equivalent requirements.
For the purposes of this paragraph:
Approval authority: Under Article 14, first paragraph, of the Inland Law legal person designated for the purpose of carrying out research;
NEN-EN-ISO/IEC 17020 (2004): the standard corresponding to the relevant indication, published by the Netherlands Standards Institute in Delft;
research: Research for the certification of inland waterway vessels as intended Article 9, first paragraph, of the Inland waterways t.
1 The Minister shall designate as an inspection body to legal persons, who shall:
(a), in its opinion, be able to carry out the investigation, anywhere in the Netherlands;
(b) are registered in the Commercial Register of the Chamber of Commerce;
c. have an establishment or representation in the Netherlands; and
Have an accreditation certificate issued by the Accreditation Board or another Accreditation Body recognised in a Member State of the European Union, demonstrating that the work is intended to be carried out in the Article 3.27 , in accordance with NEN-EN-ISO/IEC 17020 (2004) are implemented.
2 Legal persons who do not yet meet the first subparagraph of paragraph (d) may be provisionally designated, if they have submitted the application for accreditation to the Council for Accreditation and, according to a statement from the Council, may reasonably be required to do so. that the relevant legal person will comply with the conditions set out in paragraph 1 (d). A provisional designation shall be valid for no more than one year.
A verification body shall be designated for the examination of one or more in the Annex 3.11 Packages of ship types.
The designated inspection body shall be responsible for the complete investigation, without prejudice to its competence to spend on third parties, subject to the conditions for accreditation, parts of the investigation.
The notified inspection body shall carry out the examination in accordance with the requirements of the Inland waterway and, if applicable, the Transport Dangerous Substances Act , as well as the policy rules, Article 14, third paragraph, of the Act .
The designated inspection body shall report without delay to the Minister, if the owner is not prepared to recover it without delay, serious defects which are detected on a ship.
1 The designated inspection body shall take part in the commission, referred to in Article 1.20 .
2 The approval authority shall provide the Minister with unconditional and free of charge information, necessary for the exercise of supervision. This shall in any event include audit reports prepared by the accreditation body.
3 The approval authority shall give the Minister any unconditional cooperation with regard to audits and samples.
4 The approval authority shall provide the Minister with a written report every year before 1 March, in accordance with the rules or instructions to be provided by the Minister, on the investigations carried out in the preceding calendar year.
1 The designated inspection body shall notify the Minister at least 13 weeks before the intended date of termination of its work of this intention.
2 The approval authority shall inform the Minister without delay of:
(a) changes made to the inspection body in the commercial register in respect of its name and address;
b. Change, intention to suspend, suspend or terminate its accreditation.
The Minister may withdraw the designation of an inspection body if:
a. The approval authority concerned no longer complies with the Articles 3.25 or 3.30 ;
(b) the inspection body concerned shall act in breach of this scheme; or
(c) the inspection body concerned by acting or failure to act in the judgment of the Minister is liable to endanger safety or the environment.
For the purposes of this Chapter:
interested party: owner of the IWC vessel or the owner of the vessel owner;
Ligre: register in which the Minister writes each letter of measurement, as well as the date of the distribution, the name and the European ship's identification number of the IWC vessel or any other data enabling the identification of an inland waterway vessel;
maximum permissible water transfer: water transfer from an inland waterway vessel to the area of the largest authorised draught in cubic metres;
letter of measurement: a letter of measurement issued by the Minister in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter, or issued by the competent authority of another State, as attached to the Agreement;
Agreement: Agreement on the measurement of inland waterway vessels, signed in Geneva on 15 February 1966 and approved on 14 September 1967 (2), Trb. 1967, 43);
movement: in cubic metres, the displacement of an inland waterway vessel between the plane of the sinking of the empty inland waterway vessel into fresh water and the plane of the largest authorised draught.
The purpose of the measurement of inland waterway vessels shall be to:
define the movement, as well as, if necessary, part of the movement in conjunction with the breakdown;
b. if the IWB vessel is intended or used for the carriage of goods: it is possible to determine the weight of the cargo according to the breakdown;
c. If the IWB vessel is not intended or used for the transport of goods: to determine the maximum permissible water displacement and the water movement in an empty state.
1 The minister maintains a reclining to enroll of the measured inland vessels.
2 The minister shall keep the issue, extension and revocation of the measuring letter and the rectiering endorsement in the ligger.
3 The minister makes the notes as referred to in Articles 4.19, 1st paragraph , and 4.20, first paragraph -You got a call in the reclining.
1 The measurement, remeasurement or monitoring measurement shall be carried out at the request of the person concerned by the Minister or by the natural or legal persons designated by the Minister.
2 The person applying for the measurement shall follow during the measurement all the provisions of the Minister relating to the location of the vessel in the area of the sinking of the empty vessel and the possible movement of loose objects and provide the necessary assistance for the measurement and for the affixing of the calibration marks or the calibration plates and shall make available to it a satisfactory rowing boat with at least two persons.
1 The berth of the vessel to be measured or of the vessel in which the measurement is checked shall be kept in silence, preferably fresh water and so that the vessel is accessible from all sides.
2 If water is measured in bracky or salt water, the empty draught shall be corrected.
3 The water in boilers of vessels without propulsion machinery is part of the equipment of the vessel.
4 cases not belonging to those, which according to the third paragraph and according to Article 4.7 are present, are not on board.
5 If the equipment is not complete, it shall be completed for the measurement.
6 The ship is clean for the measurement; there is no water at the bottom.
7 The vessel shall, during the measurement, be horizontal and silent as much as possible.
8 As long as the conditions referred to in this Article are not met, the measurement shall not be carried out.
1 For the measurement of an inland waterway vessel, the measurements shall be measured to the vessel itself. The part of the vessel to be measured shall be that included between the area of the largest authorised draught and the plane of a sinking of the empty vessel.
2 In measuring lengths and widths, the parts of centimeters are rounded arithmetic.
3 When measuring heights, the parts from centimeters to millimeters are taken into account.
4 In computation, fractions of thousandth of parts are rounded up by arithmetic to thousandths.
5 In the final calculation of the displacement, parts of a cubic decimeter shall be neglected.
1 The plane of a sinking of the empty vessel, is the plane corresponding to the water surface, if:
a. The IWB vessel has no fuel or transportable ballast on board but only the equipment, the provisions of the vessel and the crew normally on board as the vessel is sailing; and water not available from the hold by usual means; disposed of and the supply of drinking water, which shall not be significantly greater than 0,5% of the largest movement of the vessel;
b. The tools, boilers, pipelines and installations required for propulsion, for the necessary auxiliary machinery, or for heating or cooling, water, oil or other liquids, for which they are provided under ordinary conditions to to be able to do so;
c. The inland waterway vessel is in fresh water with a specific gravity equal to 1.
2 If the inner ship is not in the position referred to in the first paragraph at the time of measurement, or not in circumstances leading to the same breakdown and about the same trim, the difference in load and the difference shall be -specific weight of water taken into account in the calculation.
3 The weights on board which belong to the empty statement are mentioned in the measuring letter.
1 The area of the largest permitted depth shall be determined in accordance with the rules applicable to that inland waterway vessel of Article 4.06, second paragraph, of Directive 2006 /87/EC .
2 For inland waterway vessels intended or used for the transport of goods, at the request of the party concerned, the maximum depth permitted shall not exceed 10% of the average load height than in the first time limit. member.
3 In special cases, at the request of the party concerned, more than 10% of the average height of loading may be reduced from the average loading altitude provided that the Minister is shown to have the greatest depth at which it is being used. ship will be able to sail less than the draught, determined according to the second member.
4 In the case of inland waterway vessels which are not intended or used for the carriage of goods, the largest authorised draught may be reduced, at the request of the person concerned, than in accordance with the provisions of the first paragraph.
On the measurement is Annex 4.1 applicable.
1 The person concerned may request to be remeasured to the Minister within twenty-six weeks of the date of issue of the letter of measurement. The remeasurement is decisive.
2 The remeasurement and, if necessary, the renewal of the calibration marks or the calibration marks shall be made free of charge if the difference with the first measurement is more than:
a. 1 percent for the move figures of up to 500 cubic metres;
b. 5 cubic metres for the move figures of more than 500 cubic metres up to 2000 cubic metres;
c. 0.25 per cent for the move figures of more than 2000 cubic metres.
The difference will be determined over the same load height.
In the cases referred to in paragraph 2, the Minister shall issue a new letter of measurement, which shall take over the distinguishing signs and the serial number of the registration in the reclining of the first measuring letter.
4 The difference with the first measurement is equal to or less than the percentages or the number of cubic metres indicated in the second paragraph, the first measurement shall be considered to be correct and the person concerned shall be the one intended for the measurement to be used for the measurement. fee payable.
1 The person concerned shall, upon remeasurement, issue the letter to the Minister in the previous measurement.
2 If it concerns a letter of measurement issued abroad, the Minister shall inform the competent authority in the other State of this fact by adding the letter of measurement which has been withdrawn.
On the remeasurement is Annex 4.1 applicable.
1 The Minister shall provide the letter of measurement no later than seven working days after the measurement.
2 The letter of measurement shall be adopted in accordance with the model set out in the Agreement.
3 On the measuring letter, the zones are defined as: Article 1.3 , in which the vessel is intended to sail, shall be indicated.
1 The period of validity of a letter of measurement shall not exceed 15 years from the date of issue.
2 The expiry date shall be indicated in the letter of measurement.
1 The period of validity of a letter of measurement shall be extended at the request of the party concerned, if a check measurement shows that the data of the letter of measurement are still correct. To this end, the following dimensions of the inland waterway vessel shall be checked:
a. the length and width, as well as the breakdown of the empty vessel on the spot of each calibration mark;
b. in the case of permanent deformations of the vessel: a number of widths using the last measurement, in order to determine whether the deformations arose before or after the last measurement.
2 The period of validity of the measuring letter may be extended in accordance with paragraph 1:
a. in the case of an inland waterway vessel intended or used for the carriage of goods, for a period not exceeding 10 years;
b. In the case of an inland waterway vessel other than that specified in subparagraph (a), for a period not exceeding 15 years.
3 The result of the check and the date on which the letter of measurement has been extended shall be recorded by the Minister in the rectirator.
4 Unless the relevant State does not permit it, the period of validity of a letter of measurement issued by one of its offices in respect of a vessel, intended or used for the carriage of goods, may be used extended, in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter.
5 The result of the verification of an inland waterway vessel measured abroad and of the date on which such a letter of measurement has been extended shall be notified to the Minister. The latter shall subsequently inform his counterpart in the other Member State of this.
1 The letter of measurement is deleted:
a. by the expiry of the period of validity;
(b) where the inland waterway vessel undergoes a conversions which affect the location of the plane of the empty vessel, either on the move or on the dimensions specified in the measuring letter;
c. When the IWB vessel, gets a different destination, or is used differently from the one for which the letter of measurement was issued;
d. where the letter of measurement has been modified by non-authorised persons to that effect;
e. When other changes or permanent damage have been made to the vessel, the description in the measuring letter is no longer correct;
f. when the measuring letter is no longer complete.
2 As a conversion referred to in paragraph 1 (b), the following shall be considered inter alia: extending the ship, increasing the gangway, changing the position of one or more lichtrands or patrolling track, immediately above the load line, all internal and external construction of the hull, loading heads and the superstructure of the ship and the placing, removal or change of machinery, boilers or the inventory, to the extent that it is the plane of the sinking of the empty vessel or of the ship It has been moved from the largest permitted depth.
3 Where a case as referred to in paragraph 1 (d) and (e) occurs, the measuring letter issued shall be replaced or amended as necessary.
1 If the Minister finds that one of the cases in question is registered in the Netherlands, Article 4.16, first paragraph , he is withdrawing the letter of measurement.
2 If one of the cases mentioned in Article 4.16, first paragraph , in the case of an inland waterway vessel registered abroad, the Minister shall inform the competent authority in the country of registration of the IWC vessel. In the letter of measurement of the corresponding IWC vessel, a statement is attached to it as determined by the Minister.
A letter of measurement issued by a Bureau of measurement of another State, as attached to the Convention, shall be equivalent to a measuring letter issued by the Minister in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter.
1 In the case of a change in the name of an inland waterway vessel, the new name shall be entered in the measuring letter at the request of the party concerned.
2 The minister shall report this endorsement to the ligger.
3 If it concerns an inland waterway vessel which has been measured abroad, the Minister shall notify the competent authority of the other State of this Note.
4 The endorsement referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article shall be authorized by the Minister.
1 Without prejudice to: Article 4.16, first paragraph , certain, may change in relation to the vessel, other than those specified in Article 4.17 , the letter of measurement shall be made. The endorsement shall be made at the request of the person concerned by the Minister.
2 In the case of an inland waterway vessel which has been measured abroad, a written authorisation from the competent authority which issued the letter of measurement shall be required for the affixing of such a note.
3 Without the written authorisation provided for in paragraph 2, a note in the letter of measurement shall also be possible with a validity of not more than three months.
4 A note as referred to in the second or third paragraph shall be authenticated in the appropriate heading in the letter of measurement, stating also the duration of the provisional validity.
5 The minister shall inform the competent authority of the other state of the endorsement.
1 If a copy of the letter of measurement is issued because the original is no longer present, this copy to the head shall contain the following sentence: This copy shall take place in lieu of the original, which has been lost.
2 The Minister may issue a copy of the letter of measurement, if it is to be deposited in a foreign mortgage office where the vessel is or will be registered. This shall be signed for a copy and shall contain the following phrase: 'Designing, intended for deposit with mortgage'.
3 The Minister may provide excerpts of letters of measurement.
The person concerned shall be lost, demoted or undeclared unfit for the voyage of a measured inland waterway vessel into the letter of measurement to the Minister.
Inland waterway vessels, intended or used for the transport of goods, may be equipped with measurement or remeasurement of calibration scales if requested by the person concerned.
1 The calibration marks or the calibration plates shall be maintained by the person concerned in such a way that they are clearly visible. The calibration marks shall be applied in light colour on a dark background or in a light colour in light colour.
2 If one or more calibration marks or span plates have been lost, worn out or become invisible, they shall be replaced, provided that the measuring letter is still valid, by the Minister at the request of the Minister by new means.
Except Section 5 This chapter applies to the Article 1.2 the Rhine, except for the Rhine, including the Waal and the Lek.
For the purposes of this Chapter:
Bilgeboot: ship which passes by other ships in ports or during operation, with the aim of ship-business waste, as intended Article 15.01, second paragraph, of the Rhine Police Regulations 1995 , to take from these ships;
bunkership: ship which passes by other ships in ports or during navigation, with the aim of supplying these ships;
Operating mode A1: 'operating mode' means a vessel's sailing time per 24 hours, as shown in the reference to that period in the master book, in accordance with the requirements of the Article 5.3, second paragraph , not more than 14 hours than in accordance with Article 5.4, first paragraph , 16 hours;
Operating mode A2: 'operating mode' means a vessel's sailing time per 24 hours, as shown in the reference to that period in the master book, in accordance with the requirements of the Article 5.3, second paragraph , not exceeding 18 hours;
Operating Mode B: 'operating mode' means a vessel's sailing time per 24 hours, as shown in the reference to that period in the master book, in accordance with the requirements of the Article 5.3, second paragraph , more than 18 hours;
Hotel ship: Passenger ship on which cabins are located for overnight passengers;
motor ship: ship which is intended for the carriage of goods and built to operate independently by means of own mechanical means of propulsion;
Pump-poor-boat: ship which passes through other ships or installations, with the aim of sucking dry bulk goods from those vessels or installations;
rest time: the time in which a crew member neither performs nor is required to do so. The monitoring and surveillance of a stationary ship shall not be considered to be a task for the purposes of this definition;
Tug: ship which is intended for the carriage of goods, constructed for the purpose of being towed and that:
1 °. Not equipped with own mechanical propellants;
2 °. is equipped with own mechanical propellants which are suitable for small distances only;
S1 and S2: standards S1 and S2 relating to equipment requirements for ships operated with a minimum crew as intended Article 3.14, first paragraph, of the Rsp ;
Tachograph: a registration device to verify compliance with regulations issued by or pursuant to the law with regard to the vessel's sailing time, including a model approved by the Minister.
For the purposes of this Chapter, account shall be taken of the periods of rest and quiet, completed for a period of 48 hours, immediately prior to the date on which the ship navigated by inland waterway, as referred to in Article 1 (2). Article 1.2 Sailed in.
2 A ship that the Article 1.2 Inland waterways inland waterway transport is provided with a boatbook as referred to in Article 3.13 of the Rsp or any other document showing how the rest periods of each crew member and the vessel's sailing times during the period referred to in the first paragraph are fulfilled.
1 At operating modes A1 and A2 Article 3.10, second and third paragraphs , and Article 3.13, fifth paragraph, of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis.
2 In the case of a tugship which does not proceed independently, and a ship the propulsion of which is placed in a close assembly by a vessel or more other vessels, Article 3.10, second and third paragraphs, of the Rsp shall apply mutatis mutandis, where the first paragraph is complied with on the ship or on the ships taking care of the propulsion of the close assembly or the towing vessel.
On rotation and repetition of operating modes is Article 3.12 of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis.
1 The minimum crew of the following categories of ships shall be established in accordance with Article 3.15 of the Rsp , except that the mate in footnote 2 shall have the competence of the skipper in question. Article 2.9 (2) :
a. Engine ships;
b. pusher craft;
c. Passenger ships, other than steamships, operating without passengers on board;
d. Floating tools that are self-driving during transport;
e. bunker vessels;
f. bilgebots;
g. Pump-poor boats.
2 By way of derogation from paragraph 1, the minimum crew of bunker vessels, bilgebots and pump vessels operating in accordance with operating mode A2 may be replaced by the crew prescribed for operating mode A1, subject to compliance with the requirements of the Annex. Following requirements for:
a. The rest period of a crew member shall be at least 12 hours, of which at least 6 hours shall be uninterrupted in any period of 24 hours from the end of the previous continuous rest period of 6 hours. The following period shall be taken at the latest by 00.00;
b. The remaining rest period shall be recorded in continuous blocks of at least one hour;
c. The rest period shall be situated outside the course of the course;
d. the ship is equipped with a well-working tachograph which has been continuously put into operation.
3 For bunker vessels, bilgebots and pump-boats with a length of less than 35 metres deployed on Dutch inland waterways with the exception of the Westerschelde, the crew prescribed for operating mode A1 also apply. may be replaced by the following:
a. Either a skipper provided that the following requirements are met:
1 °. the maximum sailing time of the ship shall be 12 hours per day and 50 hours per week;
2 °. the ship is equipped with a properly functioning tachograph which has been continuously put into operation;
3 °. the transport of dangerous goods for which on the basis of Article 3.14 of the BPR and RPR A sign shall not be authorised;
4 °. Article 6.30 and 6.32 of the Inland Navigation Police Respectively Rhine police shall remain in full force;
5 °. The distance to the place from which bunker activities shall be carried out shall not exceed 30 km, measured on the fairway. The place from which the bunker activities is made is indicated on the certificate of inquiry.
b. Either a skipper and a light seaman provided that the requirements set out in subparagraph (a) are complied with.
4 The minimum crew of close-knit assemblies, day-trips, day-trips, day-trips, hotel vessels, ferries and towing vessels shall be determined on the basis of the conditions laid down in this Arrangement. Annexes 5.1 to 5.6 .
5 The minimum crew of tugs and tugs carrying out port services shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. Annex 5.7 .
6 The minimum crew of fast spring ponts shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. Annex 5.8 . The skipper is in possession of a radar patent.
1 On motor vessels, pusher craft, pusher craft and passenger ships, if they are operated with a minimum crew, is Article 3.14 Other Article 3.18 of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis.
2 Compliance with or non-compliance with the requirements referred to in paragraph 1 shall be laid down by the Minister in a declaration.
3 The declaration referred to in Article 3.14, second paragraph, of the Rsp shall be treated in the same way as the declaration referred to in paragraph 2.
For the purpose of this paragraph Article 2.02, first and second paragraphs, with the exception of the third paragraph, of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis.
A woman who, by contract or contract of public law, carries out employment shall not be part of the minimum crew for at least 14 weeks around the probable date of confinement, of which at least six weeks are before this date and at least 7 weeks after the date of confinement.
With regard to seagoing vessels complying with the provisions of Resolution A. 890 (21) of the International Maritime Organisation of 25 November 1999 and the Convention on the Standards of Seafarers concluded in London on 7 July 1978, training, certification and watchkeeping, with Annex, (Trb. 1981, 144 and 1992, 109) Article 3.20 of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis, except that a person who holds the Rhine shipman for the Rhine is a person who is in possession of a document as referred to in the Article 2.9 (2) .
1 As regards the service booklet, the Articles 3.05 and 3.06 of Rsp , as well as the relevant information on the ground of Article 1.03 of that Regulation fixed service instructions from corresponding application, it being understood that:
a. as a local competent authority specified in Article 3.06, second paragraph , the Inspector General of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate is designated;
(b) Under skipper the commander is understood to be the commander.
2 A replacement shall enter the place of a previously issued service book and shall not be issued earlier than after the original or partly illegible copy, for which it is issued, has been delivered to the Minister.
3 The applicant whose previous service booklet has been lost or has been lost shall make a written statement on this matter when submitting his application. On page 1 of the replacement copy of the handbook, it shall be recorded that the statement referred to above was made.
1 With regard to the sailing time book is Article 5.11, second and third paragraphs ; and Article 3.13 of the Rsp applicable mutatis mutandis, except that:
(a) as authority, the Chairman of the Committee of Experts shall be appointed;
(b) Under skipper the commander is understood to be the commander; and
c. the exception for tugs and pusher craft only in ports is not applicable.
2 Where the transfer of a ship does not provide the transferring party with the vessel associated with the ship, such proof of declaration may be replaced by a declaration to be signed by the purchaser and the Minister.
3 If the serial number, intended in Article 3.13, second paragraph, of the Rsp , of the number of vessels to be replaced, is unknown to the Environment and Transport Inspectorate, the new sailing time book shall be marked with the serial number 1.
1 The sailing time book is not required with respect to ferries, ferries and open roundboat boats.
2 The pilot-in-command of a ferry or ferry crew, or of an open cruise boat, shall ensure that a ship's journey log is present on board, at the premises of a ship's journal, in which the following information shall be provided: shall be entered:
a. the name of the ship;
b. the beginning and end of the ferry service of the ship;
c. The marking of the test-setting or the official ship number;
d. members of the crew at the beginning of the day's daily ferry service, indicating their name and function, and thereafter whenever changes of composition are made.
1 In case of operating mode A1 or A2 with a tachograph is Annex A3 of Rsp applicable, and Annex 1.4 .
2 If a tachograph is used, the commander shall keep the registration of the tachograph for a period of at least six months after the last entry on board in chronological order.
1 Motor ships with a length of less than 55 metres are exempt from the following Article 5.6, first paragraph , minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. either:
1 °. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper;
2 °. the maximum sailing time of the ship shall be 12 hours per day and 50 hours per calendar week;
3 °. the minimum daily continuous rest period of the skipper shall be at least 12 hours in any period of 24 hours from the end of each rest period of at least 12 hours;
4 °. the ship shall interrupt the operation for a period of 12 hours in which the period from 10 p.m. to 6 a.m. is situated;
5 °. a reserve top-beam operating from the wheelhouse is present;
6 °. the ship shall be equipped with a functioning tachograph set in operation from the beginning of the preceding minimum continuous period of 8 continuous hours and the data of which shall be kept for a period of at least six months after the date of commencement of the operation; the last endorsement shall be retained on board in chronological order;
7 °. transport of substances for which a certificate of approval as referred to in the ADN is intended to be approved under the ADN Annex 1 to the System of Transport on the Inland Waterways of Dangerous Substances is required, is not allowed;
8 °. there shall be no hazards on the Westerschelde;
9 °. the ship meets Article 5.7 , and
10 °. in so far as the engine ship has a length greater than 33 metres, active forest control is available from the wheelhouse;
b. either:
1 °. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a light rose or deksman;
2 °. only between 22.00 and 06.00 are to be expected if the light or deksman referred to in 1 ° is 18 years of age or older; and
3 °. the requirements set out in subparagraphs (a) (7) to (10) above shall be complied with.
2 An exchange of momentum using the exemption under the requirements of paragraph 1 (a) to the operating mode A1, A2 or B, shall be permitted only if:
a. The skipper has been redeemed, or
b. In the case of verification, it can be shown that the crew member for operation A1, A2 or B, which has not been redeemed, has immediately observed an uninterrupted rest period of 8 hours outside the course of operation for the change, and the crew member Minimum crew operating modes shall be on board.
3 The operating mode A1, A2 or B may be transferred only to the operation of the exemption under the conditions laid down in paragraph 1 (a), if the operation referred to in paragraph 1 (a) of the first paragraph is The skipper shall not, immediately before the change, be part of the crew of the ship or, if it is checked, it can be shown that the skipper, if not redeemed, immediately before the alternation, 12 hours rest time outside the vessel's sailing time.
4 A ship can be used immediately for the operation of the exemption under the provisions of paragraph (a) of the first paragraph for an identical operation if the skipper is replaced by another skipper.
5 The demonstration of the rest period referred to in paragraph 1 (a) (3) (3), third and fourth paragraphs shall be carried out by means of the vessel's sailing time book.
Patrol vessels shall be exempt from Article 5.4 and Section 4 .
1 Passenger ships operating in the operating mode A1 are exempted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. Minimum crew shall consist of:
1 °. for the passenger ships of group 4 which have a maximum of 600 passengers on board: the minimum crew from group 3 for the operating mode A1;
2 °. for the passenger ships of group 3 which have a maximum of 250 passengers on board: the minimum crew from group 2 for the operating mode A1;
3 °. for the passenger ships of group 2 which have a maximum of 75 passengers on board: the minimum crew from group 1 for the operating mode A1; and
b. At the beginning of the voyage and at any time after the interruption of the voyage when embarking or debarking passengers, the skipper shall record the number of passengers on board in writing.
2 Passenger ships of group 1, of a length not exceeding 45 metres, with a maximum of 40 persons on board and operating in the operating mode A1 are exempted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a light seaman or a deksman of at least 18 years;
b. the ship shall interrupt the operation for a period of at least 16 hours, during which the period from 10 p.m. to 6 a.m. is situated: and
c. At the beginning of the voyage and after each interruption of the voyage when embarking or debarking passengers, the skipper shall record the number of passengers on board in writing.
3 In respect of passenger ships referred to in paragraph 2, in case of operation without passengers, Article 5.15, first paragraph, part a, and second paragraph , by analogy, provided that the ship has freely accessible gangbards complying with the provisions of Annex II, Article 11.02 of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC requirements.
1 sailboats of the Amsterdam grachtal type are, as far as they are operating in the operating mode A1, exempted from the following Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , prescribed minimum crew, provided that the minimum crew is composed of a skipper.
2 Open cruise boats are exempted from the following, in so far as they are operating in the operating mode A1 Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , prescribed minimum crew, provided that the minimum crew is composed of a skipper.
Ships, intended or used for the commercial operation of more than 12 persons outside the crew and designed to be moved mainly by means of sails, provided they are operating in an operating mode A1, are exempt from Article 5.4 and of the following Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , in Annex 5.2 Other Annex 5.4 minimum crew required, provided that the crew consists of:
a. A skipper; and
b. A light sailor or deksman, who is at least 18 years.
From the Articles 5.6, 4th paragraph , and 5.7, 1st Member , are exempted vessels which:
a. having a minimum crew of one skipper;
b. are intended or used for the business transport of more than 12 persons outside the crew;
c. are intended or used for sport fishing and are on track or on the road to or from inland waterways classified in zone 2 and operating system A1.
1 Without prejudice Article 5.15 Exemption from the following shall be granted in respect of motor vessels operating in A2 Article 5.6, first paragraph , for group 1 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a mate;
b. the ship is equipped with the optical devices to be able to meet Article 1.09, fourth paragraph, of the Inland waterway police ;
(c) the ship is ready to carry on the ship at the beginning of the voyage and during the voyage, no work relating to the loading or unloading of the ship shall be carried out; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
2 In respect of motor vessels operating in an operating mode A1, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, first paragraph , for group 2 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a sailor;
b. the ship is equipped with the optical devices to be able to meet Article 1.09, fourth paragraph, of the Inland waterway police ;
(c) the ship is ready to carry on the ship at the beginning of the voyage and during the voyage, no work relating to the loading or unloading of the ship shall be carried out; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
3 In respect of engine ships operating in A2, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, first paragraph , for group 2 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper, a steering man and a light sailor; and
The ship satisfies the requirements of the Standard S2 as evidenced by a statement by the Minister.
4 In respect of motor vessels operating in an operating mode A1, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, first paragraph , for group 3 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a mate;
b. The ship shall interrupt the operation during the period between 10 p.m. and 6 a.m.;
(c) the ship is ready to carry on the ship at the beginning of the voyage and does not carry out any work relating to the loading or unloading of the ship;
d. the ship is equipped with the optical devices in order to meet Article 1.09, fourth paragraph, of the Inland waterway police ;
e. the ship is equipped with a one-man steering system for sailing on radar and complies with the related articles in Chapter 7 of the RosR 1995 or Annex II, Article 7.13, of Directive 2006 /87/EC ; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
5 In respect of motor vessels operating in A2, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, first paragraph , for group 3 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew shall consist of two skippers and one sailor; and
(b) the rules referred to in paragraph 4 (e) and (f).
6 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating in the A2 type, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 1 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a mate;
b. the ship is equipped with the optical devices to be able to meet Article 1.09, fourth paragraph, of the Inland waterway police ;
(c) the ship is ready to carry on the ship at the beginning of the voyage and during the voyage, no work relating to the loading or unloading of the ship shall be carried out; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
7 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating A1, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 2 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a sailor;
b. the ship is equipped with the optical devices to be able to meet Article 1.09, fourth paragraph, of the Inland waterway police ;
(c) the ship is ready to carry on the ship at the beginning of the voyage and during the voyage, no work relating to the loading or unloading of the ship shall be carried out; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
8 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating in A2, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 2 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper, a steering man and a light sailor; and
The ship satisfies the requirements of the Standard S2 as evidenced by a statement by the Minister.
9 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating A1, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 3 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper and a mate;
(b) the rules referred to in paragraphs (b) to (e) of the fourth paragraph; and
The ship, according to a statement by the Minister, satisfies the requirements of Standard S2.
10 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating in A2, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 3 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew is made up of two skippers and a sailor; and
(b) the rules referred to in paragraphs (e) and (f) of the fourth paragraph.
11 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating A1, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 4 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. the minimum crew shall consist of a skipper, a mate and a sailor; and
(b) the rules referred to in paragraphs (e) and (f) of the fourth paragraph.
12 In respect of close-knit assemblies operating in the A2 type, exemption shall be granted from the following: Article 5.6, fourth paragraph , for group 4 minimum crew prescribed, provided that the following requirements are met:
a. The minimum crew shall consist of two skippers and two sailors; and
(b) the rules referred to in paragraphs (e) and (f) of the fourth paragraph.
For the purposes of this Chapter:
applicant: the person who wishes to be eligible for the issue of:
a. A boatmasters ' certificate as intended Article 25, first paragraph, of the Act or a Rhine patent as intended in Article 6.04, first paragraph of the Rsp ,
b. A service booklet as specified in the Article 5.11, first paragraph , or the Articles 3.03 and 3.04 of Rsp ;
c. an exemption certificate skipper roundboat of the Amsterdam grachtentype as intended in Article 7.6 ; or
d. A sailing certificate as intended Article 7.9 ;
doctor: expert, intended to Article 28, first paragraph, of the Act and the Articles 7.01, third paragraph, part a , 7.02, third paragraph, part a , 7.03, second paragraph, part a , and 7.04, first paragraph, part c, of the Rsp ;
Referee: expert, intended to Article 28, third paragraph, of the Act ;
medical consultant shipping: medical adviser shipping of the Minister, or his/her deputy;
Medical examination: Research, intended Article 6.4 , in order to:
a. A boatmasters ' certificate as intended Article 25, first paragraph, of the Act or a Rhine patent as intended in Article 6.04, first paragraph, of the Rsp ,
b. A service booklet as specified in the Article 5.11, first paragraph , as well as the Articles 3.03 and 3.04 of Rsp ;
Own Declaration: Explanation, as intended Article 26, first paragraph, of the Decision .
1 A doctor shall be the medical practitioner by decision on the basis of Article 40, first paragraph, of the Seafarers ' Law shall be appointed or the institution by decision on the basis of Article 28, first paragraph, of the Inland Law is designated.
2 An arbitrator shall be the medical examiners on the basis of Article 42, first paragraph, of the Seafarers ' Law is designated. The referee shall not be the person to whom the first investigation has been carried out.
1 The applicant shall refer to a doctor for medical examination, not being the applicant's doctor.
The doctor does not enter a medical examination than after the applicant has legitimized and the doctor in the register of Shipexam of the Inspection Environment and Transport has been able to establish that he has seen the earlier results or Records shall be entitled to carry out the inspection.
1 The doctor shall carry out the medical examination based on the verification requirements and test instructions included in the Annex 6.1 .
2 If under Annex 6.I a medical report has been prescribed, or if the applicant is in a position to comply with the requirements of the labelling, the doctor shall ask the doctor who is treating it. In the absence of sufficient information, the doctor shall refer the applicant to a specialist for a partial examination.
The medical examination shall be completed by the physician upon receipt of the information of the treating physician or the results of the specialist sub-examination.
4 The doctor shall only make use of the certificate form and the forms for the medical certificate and the notice of disapproval which shall be provided free of charge by the medical adviser on shipping.
5 The doctor shall keep the inspection form and any other documents relating to the examination, for a period of 15 years.
1 The applicant is suitable if he complies with the requirements laid down in the Annex 6.1 The doctor shall, in the case of suitability of the applicant, indicate the result of the medical examination of the medical certificate established by the model in accordance with the model, which is to be found in the medical certificate. Annex 6.2 and shall provide the medical certificate to the applicant.
2 In the case of temporary fitness of the applicant, the doctor shall provide the applicant with a medical certificate of temporary fitness.
(3) In the case referred to in paragraph 2, the same doctor who has found the applicant to be temporarily fit, or his successor or observer, shall, unless the medical adviser does so, consent to the inspection by a person who is not authorized by the applicant. other doctor.
1 The applicant is unfit if he does not comply with the labelling requirements, included in Annex 6.1 . The doctor who, after the full medical examination, considers that the applicant is unfit, shall communicate this to the applicant. The doctor shall provide the applicant with a certificate of medical incapacity established according to the model, recorded in: Annex 6.3 . The doctor shall also inform the applicant that a review may be requested from an arbitrator.
In the case referred to in paragraph 1, the doctor shall, on the same day, send the certificate of medical inadequacy, stating the reasons or reasons for disapproval, to the medical adviser. The medical adviser shall notify the authorities responsible for issuing boatmasters ' certificates, on the Rhine patents, on sailproofing certificates, on the exemption certificates or on the service booklets.
3 The applicant seeking a re-examination shall address an arbitrator under the dispatch of the certificate of medical inadequacy.
4 With regard to the re-examination, the Article 6.3, second paragraph , and 6.4 applicable mutatis mutandis, except that parts of the verification which have already been checked by the doctor do not need to be repeated, unless there is a doubt about the result of the referee. The review may consist of an exclusive assessment of the data already available.
5 If, after the re-examination, the referee considers that the applicant is medically unfit, the medical adviser shall, upon receipt of the certificate of medical incapacity, inform the authorities responsible for the medical treatment of the applicant. the issue of boatproof certificates, Rhine patents, exemption certificates or service booklets.
The doctor who, after the full medical examination, considers that the applicant is temporarily unfit, shall inform the applicant. The doctor shall provide the applicant with a certificate of temporary unfitness. By way of derogation from Article 6.6 , first paragraph, the doctor shall also inform the applicant that a review may be requested from the same doctor who has been the subject of temporary fitness for the applicant, or his successor or observer, unless the medical adviser does not consent to navigation An inspection by another doctor.
If a re-examination has not yet taken place, a medical certificate shall be certified to indicate that the applicant is fit and has been issued after being deemed unfit by any other doctor.
The Applicant applying to Article 26, first paragraph, of the Decision , a declaration of its own to the issuing authority makes use of the form set out in the Annex. Annex 6.4 .
1 If all the questions of the own statement have been answered with 'no', the applicant shall send the completed and signed declaration together with the application for the craft document to the issuing body responsible for issuing the certificate that he/she requests.
2 If at least one of the questions of the declaration has been answered by 'yes', it shall be endorsed by a doctor of his own choice showing the nature and gravity of the derogation.
3 The applicant shall send its own statement, if the second member is applicable, for the purposes of assessing:
a. The Medical Adviser shall, if its own declaration relates to the small boatmasters 'certificate, or the large boatmasters' certificate; or
b. The examiners for the small boatmasters ' certificate if the certificate is related to that boattestation.
1 In the case of: Article 6.10, first paragraph , the assessor shall declare the applicant suitable or unfit, on the basis of the verification requirements and verification instructions, included in: Annex 6.1 . In case of doubt, the assessor may call the applicant for a further examination. If necessary, the assessor may refer the applicant for a partial examination of a specialist.
2 The applicant is suitable if he meets the judgement of the assessor meets the verification requirements and test instructions included in the Annex 6.1 . In that case, the assessor shall provide the applicant with a medical certificate, established in accordance with the model, contained in: Annex 6.2 .
3 The applicant is unfit if he does not comply with the labelling requirements, included in Annex 6.1 . In the event that the assessor declares the applicant unfit, the assessor shall send the applicant a certificate of medical incapacity, subject to the possibility of re-examination.
4 In the case referred to in paragraph 3, the assessor shall send the medical adviser to shipping the same day as the certificate of medical incapacity stating the reasons or reasons for disapproval.
5 The applicant who has been declared unfit, and wishes to re-examine it, shall turn to an arbitrator who has not already been involved in the assessment of the declaration of his own. As regards the re-examination, the Article 6.3, second paragraph , and 6.4 mutatis mutandis, with the understanding that the review may consist of the exclusive assessment of the facts available.
6 The medical adviser shall notify the authorities responsible for issuing certificates of a kind, on the Rhine Patents, on sailings, on the exemption certificates or on the service booklets.
7 The examiners of the small vessel shall notify the body responsible for the issue of small boatmasters ' certificates.
The results of the medical examination shall be entered in the digital register Shipexam of the Environment and Environment, according to the instructions of the medical adviser to shipping within the time limit to be set by the medical adviser. Transport.
The Minister may give instructions for the implementation of the provisions laid down in this Chapter.
For the purposes of this Chapter:
Small boat licence I: a small vessel for navigation on rivers, canals and lakes;
small boatproof II: a small vessel for navigation on all inland waterways;
Limited or large boatmasters A: limited or large sailing certificate for navigation on all inland waterways;
limited or large vessel B: limited or large sailing ticket on rivers, canals and lakes;
Great pleasure proof I: Great pleasure proof for navigation on rivers, canals and lakes;
Great pleasure proof II: Great pleasure proof for navigation on all inland waterways;
ICC: International certificate of competence as referred to in resolution 40, no. TRANS/SC.3/147, of the Working Party on Inland Transport of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe, of 16 October 1998, according to Annex 7.5 This scheme.
Except the paragraphs 1 and 2 This chapter applies to the Article 1.2 the Rhine, except for the Rhine, including the Waal and the Lek.
Small, limited large and large boatmasters are determined according to the models included in the Annex 7.3 .
1 A boating proof is not required except as far as ships are concerned as intended in Article 16 (d) of the Decision , for ships used in the cleaning of canals and similar waters.
2 A boating proof is not required except as far as ships are concerned as intended in Article 16 (c) and (d) of the Decision , for Belgian redempers on the Westerschelde and in the open-link ports and front ports.
3 A boating proof is not required for ships as intended in Article 16 (b) and (d) of the Decision , participating in competitions on inland waterways which are not open to public traffic.
A sailing licence is not required, except in so far as it concerns ships as intended in Article 16 (d) of the Decision , for open excursion boats as intended Article 1.1 , intended or used for the commercial transport of more than 12 persons outside the crew, with a length measured in the area of the greatest breakdown of less than 20 metres, provided that the skipper is in possession of a small boatmasters ' certificate, and if the ship is sailing on the inland waterways of zone 4, or on the Beulakerwiede or the Beltercot;
1 Article 14, first paragraph, introductory wording and part b of the decision , does not apply for sailing boats of the Amsterdams grachtentype, as intended. Article 1.1 as long sailing on the inland waterways of zone 3 or zone 4, and to the extent that the skipper is in possession of:
a. the exemption certificate skipper roundboat of the Amsterdam grachtentype according to the model included in Annex 7.4 ; and
(b) a statement from the waterway operator stating the waters belonging to zone 3, the exemption certificate and the conditions under which the risk may be applied to such waters.
2 The certificate of exemption provided for in paragraph 1 shall be issued by the Minister on presentation of:
a. The Schipper roundingboat restricted area, as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational Training with the codes 95050 or 25385;
b. A medical certificate as referred to in Article 28, first paragraph, of the Act , not more than 13 weeks old; and
c. A service booklet as referred to in Article 5.4.1, showing that the applicant has gone through a sailing time of at least one year as a light sailor.
3 Upon application of the exemption provided for in paragraph 1, Article 1.4 applicable mutatis mutandis.
4 On the exemption certificate referred to in paragraph 1 (a), Article 27, first paragraph , and Article 30 of the Act applicable mutatis mutandis.
5 With regard to the demonstration of his physical and mental fitness, the holder of the exemption certificate referred to in the first paragraph shall be proof of his or her Article 27, second paragraph , and Article 28 of the Decision applicable mutatis mutandis.
6 The proof of exemption provided for in paragraph 1 shall be on board the ship.
1 The Article 14, first paragraph , and 15, first paragraph, of the Decision , do not apply to vultures, cable ponts and other non-free-feral ferries to the rivers, canals and lakes if the skipper is in possession of a small boatmasters ' certificate, and:
a. The ferry is equipped with a Marian installation and the skipper is in possession of a control certificate; or
b. The ferry is equipped with a radar installation and the skipper is in possession of the certificate Radartraining for object personnel of the Transport and Logistics department, of the Maritime Academy, of the Shipping and Transports College. STC or a certificate from any other education designated or recognised by the Minister.
2 The Article 14, first paragraph , and 15, first paragraph, of the Decision shall not apply to ships which, in the context of maritime or inland waterway aid, or in the context of the provision of such aid, are:
a. Are controlled by employees of a rescue company; or
b. Serve as a tug for ships of a length greater than 20 metres.
3 Article 14, first paragraph, part (e) of the decision shall not apply to tugs, pusher craft or tug trawlers of a length less than 20 metres or so tow, fixed board or push of a ship of less than 20 metres in length, if the skipper is in possession of a small boating certificate.
1 Article 15, first paragraph, of the Decision shall not apply to recreational craft having a length of 25 to 40 metres, if the skipper is in possession of:
2 Article 15, first paragraph , and Article 14, first paragraph, part a, of the decision shall not apply to recreational craft having a length of at least 25 metres, if the skipper is in possession of:
a. a great pleasure certificate I or II, according to the model included in Annex 7.4 , bearing the endorsement '40 metres plus'; or
b. A boatmasters ' certificate as intended Annex 7.1, Parts 1.3 or 1.4 , provided that they have been achieved before 1 July 2011.
3 The major pleasure certificate referred to in paragraph 1 shall be issued by the Minister, on presentation of a valid small boat, to:
a. The person who has passed the exam CWO large motor ship of the VAMEX Foundation;
(b) the holder of another diploma approved for this purpose by the Minister;
(c) the person who establishes that he was the owner of a recreational craft with a length of 25 to 40 metres in length, as well as a small boatman ' s certificate, respectively, to his partner and members of the family who are in possession of a small boat. time of entry into force of the Inland waterway were in possession of a small boatpiece certificate; or
d. The person who was in possession of a small boat certificate when entering into force, and can display a statement from the organization which, as the owner of a pleasure craft of 25 to 40 metres in length, declares that he is entering into force It was allowed to sail with that vessel.
4 The major pleasure certificate referred to in paragraph 2 shall be issued by the Minister, on presentation of a valid small boat, to:
(a) the person who establishes that he was the owner of a recreational craft of more than 40 metres in length, and in possession of a small boatcraft certificate, respectively, to his or her partner and family members who, in the event of a change in law, had the right to use the law. enter into force of the law in possession of a small boatmasters ' certificate; or
b. to the person who was in possession of a small boating certificate when entering into force, and can display a statement from the organisation which, as the owner of a pleasure craft of more than 40 metres in length, declares that he is in operation It was allowed to sail under the law of the vessel.
5 By way of derogation from the third paragraph:
a. A great pleasure certificate I issued in paragraph 1 to the holder of the following documents which have become invalid if the document concerned has not been lost in any way beyond the expiry of the document the validity period and the applicant's own statement to the effect that it is physically and spiritually suitable for the conduct of an inland waterway vessel:
1 ° a large vessel B;
2 ° a limited large vessel B.
b. the great pleasure certificate II referred to in paragraph 1 issued to the holder of the following documents which have become invalid if the document concerned has not been lost in any way beyond the expiry of the document the validity period and the applicant's own statement to the effect that it is physically and spiritually suitable for the conduct of an inland waterway vessel:
1 ° a large vessel A;
2 ° a limited large vessel A;
3 ° a sailing certificate;
4 ° a large patent;
5 ° a small patent.
6 By way of derogation from the fourth paragraph:
(a) the large pleasure certificate I issued in paragraph 2 (1) issued to the holder of the following documents which have become invalid if the document concerned has not been lost in any way beyond the expiry of the document the validity period and the applicant's own statement to the effect that it is physically and spiritually suitable for the conduct of an inland waterway vessel:
1 ° a large vessel B;
2 ° a limited large vessel B.
b. the great pleasure certificate II referred to in paragraph 2 has been issued to the holder of the following documents which have become invalid if the document concerned has not been lost in any way beyond the expiry of the document the validity period and the applicant's own statement to the effect that it is physically and spiritually suitable for the conduct of an inland waterway vessel:
1 ° a large vessel A;
2 ° a limited large vessel A;
3 ° a sailing certificate;
4 ° a large patent;
5 ° a small patent.
7 By way of derogation from the third to sixth paragraph, the following shall be:
(a) the major pleasure certificate I issued in the first and second paragraphs, issued to the holder of:
1 ° a valid large vessel B;
2 ° a valid limited large vessel B.
b. The great pleasure certificate II referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be issued to the holder of:
1 ° a valid large vessel A;
2 ° a valid limited large boating certificate A;
3 ° a valid sailing certificate;
4 ° a valid major patent;
5 ° a valid small patent.
8 The major pleasure certificates referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be issued for rivers, canals and lakes to the applicant for use at the time of entry into force of the Inland waterway holds a small vessel, I, for all inland waterways, to the applicant, who at that time is the holder of a small vessel II.
9 The holder of a major pleasure certificate I, who is also in possession of a small boat II, is eligible for the great pleasure certificate II.
10 The diplomas referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) of paragraph 3 shall be obtained after the examination of an examination by the Minister.
11 The third paragraph, parts c and d, or the persons referred to in paragraph 4 may, until 1 July 2011, submit an application for the acquisition of a major pleasure certificate.
12 On the great pleasure proof are Article 30 of the Act and Article 1.4 applicable mutatis mutandis.
13 With regard to the demonstration of his physical and mental fitness, the holder of the great pleasure certificate Article 22, fourth and fifth paragraphs , and Article 26 of the Decision applicable mutatis mutandis.
14 The great pleasure proof is on board the ship during the voyage.
1 The Article 14, first paragraph, parts a, b and c, below 1 ° , and 15, 1st Member ; and 16 of the Decision , do not apply to ships, intended or used for business transport of persons and furnished to be propelled mainly through sails, if the skipper is in possession of a sailing certificate according to the model. Included in Annex 7.4 .
2 Of Article 16 of the Decision shall be exempt from masters of ships, provided that they bear the sailing licence referred to in paragraph 1.
3 The sailing certificate shall be issued by the Minister upon presentation of:
a. The Schipper certificate of sailing from the CBR or the Foundation Education Fund for Shipping, or the Diploma Steering Mate Kleine Sailing from the Enkhuizer Shipping School;
b. A medical certificate as referred to in Article 28, first paragraph, of the Act , not more than 13 weeks old; and
c. a service booklet as intended in Article 5.11 , which indicates that the applicant has completed a two-year sailing time as a member of the deck crew on board sailing ships.
4 The diploma provided for in paragraph 3 (a) shall be obtained after the examination of an examination by the Minister.
5 On the application of the sailing certificate is Article 1.4 applicable mutatis mutandis.
6 On the sailing certificate are Article 27, first paragraph , and Article 30 of the Act applicable mutatis mutandis.
7 With respect to the demonstration of his physical and mental fitness, are on the holder of the sailing certificate Article 27, second paragraph , and Article 28 of the Decision applicable mutatis mutandis.
8 The first, sixth and seventh members shall apply mutatis mutandis to sailproof certificates issued by the Foundation Royal Education Fund for Shipping.
9 The sailing certificate is on board the ship.
1 The in Article 22, second and third paragraphs, of the Decision The medical certificate provided in addition to the certificate shall be issued in accordance with the model in which the certificate is issued: Annex 6.2 and authenticated by the body issuing the vessel.
2 Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 22, second paragraph, of the Decision May also be sufficient for a 50-year-old, 50-year-old and 60-year-old. In that case, the medical certificate shall not be displayed in addition to the boatmasters ' certificate.
3 Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 22, third paragraph, of the Decision It may also be sufficient to obtain a certificate of boatage after reaching the age of 65. In that case, the medical certificate shall not be displayed in addition to the boatmasters ' certificate.
1 As boatmasters ' certificate as intended Article 35b, first paragraph, part b, of the Maritime Traffic Act , be designated the large vessel A, the large vessel B, the limited large boatmasters A, the limited size B, the small boatmasters I, the small boatmasters II, the proof of the exemption provided for in Article 7.6, 1st paragraph , the sailing certificate, intended in Article 7.9, first paragraph , as well as an approved foreign certificate of competency as intended Article 7.11 .
2 As categories of boatmasters ' certificates, intended for use in Articles 48, fifth paragraph , and 49, second paragraph, of the Act , are designated the small vessel I, the small boat II, as well as recognised foreign certificates of competency as intended Annex 7.1 , parts 1.3 and 1.4.
1 The Minister may recognise a certificate of competency for navigation on rivers, canals and lakes or for navigation on all inland waterways, in so far as the evidence in his judgment provides sufficient guarantees for the safe conduct of a ship on the surface of the river. Waters concerned.
2 The in Article 17, second paragraph, of the Decision Referred to in the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine, shall be proof of proficiency:
a. The large patent as equivalent to the large boatmasters 'certificate, the limited large boatmasters' certificate and the small boatmasters ' certificate;
b. The small patent as equivalent to the limited large boatmasters 'certificate and the small boatmasters' certificate;
c. The sports patent as equivalent to the small boating certificate.
The Annex 7.1 said foreign certificates of competency shall be recognised as intended: Article 17, fourth paragraph, part a, of the decision .
The Annex 7.2 Certificates of competency mentioned shall be recognised for total and partial relief from the examination of the knowledge and ability to conduct a ship, as specified in the Annex. Article 20, first paragraph, part b, of the decision .
Medical certificates of doctors belonging to, or appointed to, the requirements of the attached 1 in the provision of service instruction No 2 of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine shall be recognised as intended: Article 32, third paragraph, of the Act .
Without prejudice to: Article 1.9 are the provisions relating to the radar patents of the Rsp and the Articles 1.11 and 1.12 applicable, mutatis mutandis, to the other inland waterways other than the Rhine, including the Waal and the Lek.
For the purposes of this paragraph, examiner means the institutions or persons referred to in Article 29, first paragraph, of the Act .
1 The examination for the acquisition of the small vessel I shall cover the following subjects:
a. the legal provisions, in so far as they are relevant for the safety of navigation on rivers, canals and lakes;
b. The handling of the propulsion machinery;
c. the safety measures;
d. the waterways, the conditions of sailing water and basic meteorology;
e. the boating, manoeuvring and the measures to be taken under special circumstances.
2 The examination for the acquisition of the small vessel II shall cover the subjects referred to in paragraph 1 and shall include:
a. the legal provisions, to the extent that they are relevant to the safety of navigation on the Westerschelde, the Eems and the Dollard;
b. The use of nautical documents;
c. the rate and location determination;
d. Meteorology.
1 The examination for the purpose of obtaining the limit of the large number of boatmasters 'A and the large boatmasters' certificate A relates to the subjects listed in Part 1 of Chapter A and Chapter C of Annex II to this Directive. Directive No 96 /50/EC .
2 The examination for the acquisition of the limited licence B and the large vessel B refers to the subjects listed in Part 2 of Chapter A and Chapter C of Annex II to Annex II to the Convention. Directive No 96 /50/EC .
3 An amendment to Annex II of Directive No 96 /50/EC For the purposes of this Article, it shall apply from the date of implementation of the amending Directive concerned.
1 After the examination of the examination for the purpose of obtaining the boatmasters ' examination, the certificate shall be made by: Article 26, first paragraph, of the Act It was issued.
2 The declaration shall state for which of the Article 13 of the Decision of the said boatmasters ' examination.
1 To qualify for the issue of a limited licence or a large vessel, the applicant shall have the attestation provided for in: Article 7.17 And he also shows that he has gone through a good time of at least three or four years of his life.
2 As a sailing time referred to in paragraph 1, the experience gained from the applicant after reaching the age of 16 shall be considered as a member of:
a. The deck crew of an inland waterway vessel, intended for commercial navigation; or
b. The deck crew of an inland waterway vessel of a length of 15 metres or more, intended for non-commercial navigation, on the inland waterways of the European Union or on inland waterways crossing the external border of the Union.
3 As a sailing time as referred to in paragraph 1, the person who serves or has done so as registry hangars shall also be entitled to operate an inland waterway vessel for a period of 48 months on inland waterways, at least during 64 day trips. for commercial navigation.
4 The assessment of the sailing time shall be carried out by the Minister.
(1) Where the applicant demonstrates experience as a member of the deck crew of a ship, for commercial service at sea, or of a ship of 15 metres in length or more, intended for non-commercial sea shipping, shall be the period for each year of this experience, Article 7.18, first paragraph , less than one year, but not more than two years ' time, with 250 days of sea as a year of sailing time as intended Article 7.18, first paragraph -That's right.
2 If the applicant holds a diploma of training for inland waterway transport of which practical placements are part, the period shall be referred to: Article 7.18, first paragraph -reduced by the length of the course of training, but not more than three years ' time.
3 If the applicant doing or has done that service as a registry pilot demonstrates experience as a member of the deck crew of a ship, intended for maritime service, shall be the period for each whole year of this experience; Intended in Article 7.18, third paragraph , reduced by nine months, and the number of day trips to which an inland waterway vessel, for commercial operation, is controlled, is reduced by 12 days of day travel, but not less than a 12-month sailing time in which the vessel is For sixteen day trips an inland waterway vessel, intended for commercial operation, has been administered.
The sailing time specified in Article 7.18, first paragraph , shall be reduced by three years for the applicant who:
a. Holder is of the certificate of practical examination, in order to ensure that he has passed the Master Master of the Practice Examination of the CBR; or
b. having taken good results, by a practical examination, which has been approved by international rules or by a competent authority abroad and by the Minister.
1 The examiner shall offer exams at least once a year to complete examinations. It shall be known in good time for the time at which it is to be notified for an examination and for which notification is required. He shall also specify the fee to be paid for the examination, and the method of payment.
2 The examiner shall ensure that examinations are taken in appropriate locations. He is supervising and taking a good course of business in the exam. Among other things, measures are being taken to prevent deceit.
3 If irregularities have occurred during the examination, the examiner shall, as soon as possible, draw up a report on the case of the case.
4 The examiner shall keep the report and the examination documents for one year from the end of the examination.
1 The examinations for the acquisition of a small boating certificate, a limited seaman, a large boating certificate, a certificate of practical examination and a certificate of practical examination shall be taken in accordance with an examination procedure and an examination of a certificate of practical examination. examination programme which has been approved by the Minister.
2 The Secretary of State shall approve the examination rules and examination programme only if, in his opinion, they contain sufficient guarantees that the requisite knowledge and competence of the candidate is properly examined.
1 An application for the issue of a duplicate shall be submitted by the holder of the certificate to the authority responsible for issuing the certificate by the Minister, giving the reason for the certificate.
2 The applicant whose previous certificate has been lost or has been lost shall make a written statement on this matter when submitting his application.
3 In so far as the certificate is still present, this shall be submitted at the same time as the application.
(4) If the holder of a lost proof has returned it to his decision, he shall immediately submit that certificate to the authority responsible for issuing the certificate by the Minister.
1 In the case of a change in the name of the holder of the certificate, and if the validity of the certificate has not expired more than one year, it may, while maintaining the original period of validity, provide for a certificate of the modified data. shall be issued.
2 An application for the issue of a boatmasters ' certificate referred to in paragraph 1 shall be submitted by the holder of the certificate to the authority responsible for issuing the certificate by the Minister, stating the reason.
3 The certificate shall be submitted to the application for the submission of the certificate to be replaced.
1 The authorities responsible for issuing boatlicences shall immediately inform the National Unit and the Zeepon Police Department of the Regional Unit of Rotterdam, in writing, of:
a. The certificate of invalidation for the whole or partial validity period of a boatmasters ' certificate;
b. the invalidation of a major pleasure certificate as intended in Article 7.8 ;
c. the imvalidation of a sailing certificate as intended Article 7.9 ;
d. the invalidation of an exemption certificate as referred to in Article 7.6 .
2 The notification referred to in paragraph 1 shall be notified simultaneously to the holder of the boatmasters ' certificate.
The authority issuing the small boat certificate, on behalf of the Minister, shall issue to the holder of a valid small boat licence I or II, a valid major pleasure certificate I or II or a certificate of Theoretical Coastal Navigation of the Vessel Holding the Vessel Holding the vessel. the Royal Netherlands Watersports Covenant, under the following:
a. the combined small vessel I/ICC inland vessel;
b. The combined small vessel II/ICC inland + coastal;
c. The combined major pleasure proof I/ICC inland;
d. The combined major pleasure proof II/ ICC inland + coastal;
e. ICC coastal area.
The Minister provides a Navigation on the Rhine, intended to Article 2 (2) (a) of the Decision If the conditions laid down in Articles 3 to 5 of the Annex to this Regulation are complied with. Regulation (EEC) No 2919/85 .
1 The Rhine declaration shall be determined in accordance with the model in Annex 8.1 This scheme.
2 The declaration referred to in Article 5, second paragraph, of the Annex to: Regulation (EEC) No 2919/85 shall be established in accordance with the model established in Annex 8.2 This scheme.
1 The Minister shall provide a certificate of admission in accordance with Article 2, second paragraph, part b, of the decision , if the provisions of Article 4 (2) of the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine are complied with.
2 The proof of acceptance shall be established in accordance with the model Annex 8.3 This scheme.
Of the obligation referred to in Article 2, second paragraph, of the Inland waterway decision , are exempted ferries that cross the stream.
Referred to as appropriate document Article 2, second paragraph, part c, of the decision , have been designated the attestes referred to in Article 2, third paragraph, of Regulation (EEC) No 1418/EEC 3921/91 -of the Council of the European Communities of 16 December 1991 laying down the conditions under which non-resident carriers may operate domestic goods or passengers by inland waterway in a Member State (PbEG L 373).
The holder of a document of admission shall ensure that this document can be verified in any of the following ways:
a. On board the IWB vessel, for which the document was issued; or
b. At the premises of the owner or operator of that IWB vessel.
The registration number, as intended Article 30 of the Decision , shall be affixed to the inner ship at the place and manner intended in Article 2.01, first paragraph, point (a) of the Rhine Police Regulations 1995 taking into account the provisions of Article 2.01, third paragraph, of that Regulation .
The person in charge of continuing the transport activity of an undertaking consisting of the commercial transport of goods, other than for the purpose of, or coming from, the undertaking, with vessels of a kind used in the transport sector, Deadweight of 50 tonnes or more, as well as the persons specified in Article 2.5, first paragraph , shall be periodically provided for periods to be determined by the Central Bureau of Statistics in one or more periods and within 14 days of the end of that period, to the Central Statistical Office, and shall indicate:
a. The date of transport;
b. types of transport;
c. Ship data;
d. the country, region or territory and the place of loading and unloading, respectively, the country, region or area and place of departure and arrival at emptiration;
e. the distance between the place or places of loading and the place or places of unloading, or the distance between the place of departure and the arrival at empanage;
f. weight, expressed in tonnes, of the goods transported;
g. the nature of the goods transported;
h. The number of laden and empty containers by size;
The identification number, class and number of the substance transported in the case of transport of dangerous substances.
As civil servants in the sense of Article 40, first paragraph, part b, of the Act The officials of the Environment and Transport Inspectorate who are responsible for monitoring and tracing shall be appointed.
As civil servants in the sense of Article 40, second paragraph, of the Act shall be appointed to the officials, among other members, of:
a. The Havenmaster division of the Port of Havenbedrijf Amsterdam N.V.
b. The Directorate-General for the Rijkswaterstaat of the Ministry of Infrastructure and the Environment;
c. The Havenmaster division of Havenbedrijf Rotterdam N.V.
d. the Labour Inspectorate.
1 As officials within the meaning of Article 40, second paragraph, of the Act shall be designated officials of the Article 10.4 The provinces, the municipalities of which are the same as those of the college of the Member States, the college of mayor and aldermen on the daily administration as such have been appointed.
2 The College of Member States, the College of the Mayor and the Executive Board of Governors of the Executive Board on a daily basis only states officials who, in its opinion, are sufficiently competent in respect of the Law And surveillance or detection.
1 The in Article 10.3, first paragraph , the provinces are: Fryslân, Groningen and Overijssel.
2 The in Article 10.3, first paragraph , the municipalities are: Aalsmeer and Amsterdam.
3 In Article 10.3, first paragraph , meant water is: Rivierenland.
1 The amounts of the administrative penalty for infringements referred to in the Article 5, first paragraph , 6, first paragraph and sixth member , 7, first paragraph , 8, third member , 10, second paragraph , 11 , 12 , 13, fourth member , 21, 1st Member , 22, ninth member , 23, first paragraph , 25, fourth member and fifth member 28, seventh member , 31, fourth member , 33, second paragraph , 36, fourth member , 37, second paragraph , 38, seventh member , 43, second paragraph , and 46, second member, of the law are included in Table 1 in Annex 11.1 This scheme.
2 The amounts of the administrative penalty for infringements referred to in the Articles 39c, third paragraph , and 39th, of the law are included in Table 2 in Annex 11.1 This scheme.
1 On inland vessels not under the scope of application of Directive No 82 /714/EEC The Council of the European Communities of 4 October 1982 laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels (PbEG L 301) was subject to the scope of the Directive, Article 8 (2), second, third and fourth quarters of the Directive, was member, of Directive 2006 /87/EC applicable.
2 As deficiencies which are not manifestly dangerous as referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 8, second subparagraph, of Directive 2006 /87/EC In any case, the deficiencies of inland waterway vessels referred to in paragraph 1 shall be classified as falling within the scope of the entry into force of the Law Transitional provisions of the Internal Decree As it was at the time.
3 In addition to the second paragraph applies to existing sailing passenger ships that the deficiencies arising from the transitional provisions related to the Articles 9.01 and 9.02 of Annex VII and the Articles 9.01 and 9.06 of Annex III to the Act of Entry As that stated in the entry into force of the Law , until no later than 10 years from the date of the first examination, after 27 September 2000.
In the case of an inland waterway vessel, the area of which is the largest permitted depth at the time of the last measurement, Article 5 of the Metfication Decision Inland vessels 1978 As this stated before the entry into force of the Decision of 23 March 1998 amending the Metfication Decision , in the event of a remeasurement, the area of the greatest permissible depth may be fixed at the request of the party concerned, provided that the vessel has not undergone any alteration since the last measurement which may affect the establishment of that level.
1 Vessel's licence issued in accordance with the Scheme establishing model large boatmasters ' certificate , remain valid subject to compliance with that scheme until their validity has expired.
2 Small boatmasters ' certificates and major pleasure tickets issued under this scheme before 1 January 2010 shall remain valid until their validity expires.
3 Service booklets, fairtime books, Rhine patents, attestes and other documents issued before 1 July 2011 on the basis of Chapter 23 of the RosR 1995 , the Rhine Patent Regulation or the Regulations concerning safety personnel on board passenger ships , remain valid until their validity has expired.
Officials who, at the time before the entry into force of the Act, were authorized by the Minister to supervise or verify compliance with, or pursuant to, the provisions of the Law of the Member State, Interior Creation Act , the Law and crew law inland waterway transport , the Inland waterway transport law or the Revised Convention Act, retain that power until 31 December 2009 or as much earlier as they Chapter 10 shall be deprived of their competence to supervise or to identify them.
1 The Foundation for Water Training in Nieuwegein issued to 1 July 2009 in Nieuwegein awarded diplomas CWO large motorship as well as the Certificate of Boat Management (MBL) M3 issued by Scouting Nederland as being in the Article 7.8 (a) (a) (a) , referred to as a diploma awarded by the VAMEX Foundation.
2 For two years from the date of entry into force of the Act, one shall apply to Interior Creation Act issued small sailing license as it is in Article 7.8 Such great pleasure proof.
This arrangement shall enter into force simultaneously with Inland waterway .
This arrangement is cited as: Inland waterway scheme.
This scheme will be annexed to the Official Journal. Such a notice shall be communicated in the Official Journal.
TheState Secretary
of Vertimes and Waterstate,J.C. Huizinga-Heringa
(1) Road traffic shall be decided upon request for type approval of a tachograph.
(2) The Road Traffic Service shall immediately inform the Secretariat of the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine of the approved types of tachographs.
Type-approval may be granted if the tachograph complies with the requirements of the Annex A3 of Rsp .
The tachograph shall be installed on the ship so as to ensure that all components containing the tachograph are properly protected against damage.
The Road Traffic Service shall decide on a request for:
a. Approval as the installer of tachographs;
b. Recognition as a repairer of tachographs.
2. A request for recognition shall be submitted to the Road Traffic Service.
1. Recognition shall be granted to manufacturers or importers of tachographs established in the Netherlands.
(2) As an importer, the importer approved by the manufacturer of tachographs shall be deemed to be an importer.
The Road Traffic Service may revoke a recognition as an installer or repairer if it is subject to the regulations in this scheme or in the Rsp are not met.
1. The approval granted to a manufacturer or importer of tachographs as an installer or repairer of tachographs shall also apply to installers and repairers who have been requested by him on request.
(2) An authorisation may be granted only where such installers and repairers are satisfied with the requirements of Article 9.
(1) The authorisation shall be revoked by the approved manufacturer or importer if it is established that the requirements referred to in Article 9 are not fulfilled or the requirements referred to in Article 3, or the obligation laid down in Article 11, are not to be complied with. Compliance.
2. Upon revocation of the authorisation, the manufacturer or importer of tachographs shall inform the Road Administration immediately.
(1) The installation, examination or repair of tachographs may be carried out only by fitters or repairers, respectively, provided that:
a. A sealing device bearing a seal number;
b. Tool and test equipment prescribed by the manufacturer or importer of tachographs and testing equipment.
(2) The personnel designated for the installation, examination or repair of the tachograph shall carry out, with appropriate results, a course organised by the manufacturer or importer of tachographs in the construction, functioning, Installation, investigation and repair of tachographs.
3. The staff then follows a refresher course at least once during the three years.
(4) Evidence of participation in the course issued by the manufacturer or importer is present in the company with the installer and repairman respectively.
The manufacturer or importer of tachographs in the possession of an installer or repairer of tachographs shall be required to ensure that:
a. Authorised installers and repairers shall be assigned a seal number;
(b) The Road Administration shall provide the fitters and repairers for which he has authorized, and the seal number or the seal numbers assigned to the authorised installers and repairers.
c. to the Minister for the modifications of the provisions made by him B immediate communication is made;
d. The installers and repairers he authorised to have in possession of:
1 °. the rules referred to in Article 3,
2 °. technical instructions, instructions and communications issued by him; and
e. he shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements of the installers and repairers he has authorized.
Of the declaration referred to in the Annex A3, Part B, point 6 of the Rsp keep a copy of the installer for seven years from its day in service.
Rules governing shipping staff on the Rhine (Rsp)
Minimum requirements:
-the electronic inland maps shall accurately reflect the contours of the river and of the fairway and shall be based on the official electronic inland maps;
-the electronic inland navigation cards are stored in the visualization system on board the ship.
Recommendation:
Use the most recent official electronic navigation charts.
Minimum requirements:
-the apparatus for the visualisation of electronic cards is connected to the Inland AIS by a reliable cable connection;
-during the voyage of the ship, the apparatus is intended solely for the purpose of visualizing electronic inland waterway cards;
-the visualized information is visible from the control position.
Recommendations:
-the system of visualization of electronic cards complies with the requirements of the standard Inland ECDIS standard in the information mode;
-use an additional separate electronic map visualization system for the information mode, if the ship is equipped with an Inland ECDIS equipment in the navigation mode.
Minimum requirements:
-the software represents the correct and up-to-date position of the ship's own vessel on the electronic inland navigation card;
-the software gives the correct and current position of the other ships in the electronic inland navigation card;
-the software offers the possibility to display the detailed list of AIS information, as referred to in Article 4.07 (4) of the Rhine Police Regulations, of an chosen vessel.
Recommendations:
-the software for the visualisation of electronic inland navigation cards complies with the requirements concerning navigation mode of the applicable Inland ECDIS Standard;
-the software for visualizing an electronic inland navigation card, orient it so that the ship follows the axis of the fairway.
The freeboard shall be at least 0,40 m.
The safety distance shall be at least:
a. For vessels which do not have a bulkhead deck, up to the lowest point of the board 80 cm.;
b. To non-watertight lockable openings 60 cm;
c. To underside of gates and windows, which are located in the ship ' s house and which can be opened 30 cm.
For passenger ships, the total mass P of the bow-anchor shall be calculated according to the following formula:
P = k.B. T + 4.Finish [ kg]
In this formula:
k: the coefficient referred to in Annex II of Directive 2006 /87/EC, Article 10.01 second paragraph;
Off: the frontal wind surface in m 2 .
In addition to the requirements of Annex II to Directive No 2006 /87/EC Required equipment shall have on board vessels in Area 2:
a. A compensated compass;
b. updated sea charts of the areas in which the ship is sailing;
c. Suitable means of card adjustment;
d. adequate resources for the determination of water depth;
e. a radio receiver with which the weather messages can be received.
There is a radio telephone installation which allows for talks in the public transport sector.
In no place of the ship is the parts (a) or (b) of Article 15.02 (1) of Annex II to this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC calculated value less than 4 mm.
Passenger ships operating in the zone 2 shall bear an endorsement in the certificate of investigation which indicates that they comply with the additional requirements set out in this Annex.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
This Annex applies in the port area of Amsterdam, Zaanstad, Beverwijk and Velsen, including the North Sea Canal, the Zaan, the Knollendammervaart and the North-hollandsch Canal from the IJ to the crossing with the Knollendammervaart, with except that the boundaries of this area on the eastern side are formed by the Oranjeslice, on the western side through the locks of IJmuiden and on the Amsterdam-Rhine Canal by the estuary of the Lozingscanal.
Without prejudice to the requirements set out in this Annex, Amsterdam shall comply with Annex II of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC with the exception of Articles 8.08, 10.01,10.02,10.04,10.05, first paragraph and 11.02, second and fourth members.
The outer face of the deck of an Amsterdam deck board shall be provided with a footlist of at least 0,03 m height and a reling of at least 0,90 m height. The reling may be removable.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
For the purposes of this Annex:
CNG: natural gas;
CNG system: the whole of fitted parts which makes it possible to use CNG as a fuel for the propulsion engine;
ECE Regulation No 67: the publication 'Uniform provisions concerning the approval of specific equipment of motor vehicles using liquefied petroleum gases in their propulsion system', adopted by the Economic Commission for Europe and published by the United Nations;
ISO 2604-2: the publication ' Steel products for pressure purposes; Quality requirements Part 2: 'Seamless Tubes' issued by the International Organization for Standardization;
EN-EN 10204: the publication 'Metallic products; Types of inspection documents', published by the Netherlands Standardisation institute.
Without prejudice to the provisions of this Annex, excursion boats of the Amsterdam grachtant type shall comply with Annex II of this Annex. Directive 2006 /87/EC except for the first paragraph of Article 3.03, first paragraph, 7.02, 8.01, third paragraph, where applicable to the main engine, 10.01, 10.02, first paragraph, point (d), and second paragraph, point (c), (d), (e), and (h), 10.03, first paragraph, 10.05, first paragraph, 11.04, 11.02, second member and fourth member, concerning witchwork or hiding, 15.05, 15.06, fourth paragraph, sixth paragraph (f), 11th member and seventeenth member, 15.09, 15.11, seventeenth paragraph, 15.12, second to ninth paragraph, 15.12, first paragraph, 15.10, third and sixth paragraph, and 15.13.
(1) The maximum number of passengers permitted shall be determined in such a way as to ensure compliance with the stability and free board requirements.
2. The maximum number of passengers allowed is no greater than the number of seats available for passengers.
3. For the seats, a width of at least 0,45 m per person shall be counted. The free distance between banks or seats shall be equal to or less than 0,30 m.
Where passengers are able to take place in an open cockpit or on an open deck, the fixed position or railings shall be placed at least 0,20 m within the external side of the ship, including mountain defects.
1. The free passage of the accesses is at least 0,80 m. The free width of the gangway between the seats shall be 0,90 m height and above the floor at least 0,70 m above the floor. Up to a height of 0,90 m above the floor, this width shall not be less than 0,60 m.
2. An emergency exit with a free passage of at least 0,80 m shall be applied to the rear ship. The emergency exit may be replaced by at least two ejectable roof hatches, each of which has a free opening of at least 0,36 m 2 Have a The smallest size shall not be less than 0,50 m.
3. If a passenger accommodation is subdivided into watertight compartments by means of watertight bulkheads and watertight doors of limited height, these compartments can be safely abandoned. In so doing, the escape route may run from one compartment through another.
The construction of the windows is of sufficient strength, depending on the height above the loaded load line and of the area of the sailing water.
At least one rescue buoy shall be present per each permitted number of 25 passengers and the number remaining above the limit. However, the number of rescue buoys shall not be more than four.
1. There are at least two portable fire extinguishers present. These are located in the vicinity of the steering position.
2. Where the cruise boat is equipped with a CNG system, the space in which the propulsion engine is installed shall be equipped with a fixed fire-extinguishing system.
When used on inland waterways of zone 3, vessels shall be equipped with an anchor weighing not less than 50 kg and having a anchor chain or anchor wire of at least 30 metres in length. The anchor weight may be reduced when application of special anchor types with increased adhesive force.
1. The following watertight bulkheads, which reach to the top of the shipboard, shall be installed:
a. An initial bulkhead, situated at least 0,10 m and not more than 0,60 m behind the pre-lead line;
b. A bulkhead between the engine room and the passenger compartment;
c. A rear peak bulkhead at a reasonable distance from the stern. On ships having a length of 25 m or less, the back peak bulkhead may be omitted.
2. If the round-boat is fitted with a CNG system, pierliners shall be sealed by bulkheads.
Pierations of the machine gun are also fire-resistant.
Outboard connectors are directly on the skin with a valve. This does not apply to toilets equipped with a metal pot, mounted on a didiscus steel pipe, so that the top edge of the pot has a safety distance of at least 0,40 m.
1. The power of the propelling plant shall be such as to enable the fully-loaded vessel to come to a standstill in a journey of up to two times the length of the ship in full capacity of power.
2. The control position shall be capable of being read from the steering position:
a. The temperature of the cooling water and the pressure of lubricating oil from propellant motors and
b. Speed of propellant engines or propeller shafts.
3. Where the propelling engine uses fuel with a flash point below 55 ° C:
a. CNG shall be used as a fuel; and
b. The propelling engine shall be equipped with fuel by means of a CNG system.
4. If a circular boat of the Amsterdam grachtingtype is fitted with a CNG system during construction, the construction drawings for the start of construction have been approved by the Minister.
5. If a circular boat of the Amsterdam grachtine type is fitted with a CNG system, the construction drawings of the CNG system itself and the construction drawings for its installation, before the start of the construction, are approved by: Minister.
(6) The approval referred to in the fourth and fifth paragraphs shall be granted if, in the reasonable opinion of the Minister, the safety of the boat and the boat on board, in so far as it relates to the construction and method of construction of the vessel, is to be taken into account. CNG system, which will be sufficiently guaranteed.
(1) The CNG system shall contain only the components referred to in this Article.
(2) The CNG system shall consist of at least the following elements:
a. A CNG tank;
b. An overpressure security for the purpose of the CNG tank;
c. An automatic refuelling valve;
d. A manometer;
e. A heat exchanger and pressure regulator, if appropriate combined;
f. An automatic shut-off valve;
g. A filling of the vulaby;
h. A return valve in the charge line;
gas pipelines;
j. an injection piece or a gas mixing piece; and
c. Gas-feeding compounds between the components of the CNG system.
3. The following components may be part of the CNG system:
a. A hand-held valve;
b. gas hoses;
c. A gas control unit;
d. A CNG filter unit;
e. A pressure or temperature sensor; or
f. Electrical equipment.
4. additional components for the proper functioning of the engine may be fitted in the part of the CNG system where the pressure is lower than 50 kPa.
1. The components referred to in point (a) to (h) and third paragraph (a) and (e) of Article 13 shall comply with the standards of the ECE Regulation No 67 at the time of installation for the components concerned.
2. The components referred to in points (i) and (j) and (b), (c) and (d) of Article 13, second paragraph, shall comply with the standards of the ECE Regulation No 67 applicable at the time of installation, as far as they are concerned. components are used in a part of the CNG system where the pressure can be greater than 50 Kpa.
(3) Parts which are not subject to standards in the ECE Regulation No 67 at the time of installation and used in a part of the CNG system where the pressure may exceed 50 Kpa have been approved by the Minister.
4. The components referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall bear a valid approval mark No 67, unless it is not possible as a result of the nature or function of the component.
5. A part referred to in the first or second paragraph shall be entered on an on board list, indicating the information of the approval mark, named in the fourth paragraph.
(6) A part referred to in paragraph 3 shall be entered on an on board list, indicating the brand name and the type designation and stamped with the approval, as referred to in the third paragraph.
The components of the CNG system shall withstand the highest pressure that may occur under normal operating conditions in the part of the CNG system where a component has been installed.
(1) The functions of the components referred to in Article 14, first, second and third paragraphs shall not be combined in one part.
2. By way of derogation from the first paragraph, the functions of the following components may be combined in a single component:
a. The overpressure security for the CNG container referred to in point (b) of Article 13, second paragraph, with the automatic shut-off valve referred to in point (c) of Article 13 (2);
b. The heat exchanger and pressure regulator referred to in Article 13 (e) with the automatic shut-off valve referred to in point (f) of Article 13, second paragraph;
c. The CNG filter unit, referred to in Article 13 (3) (d), with the components referred to in Article 13 (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and (j) and with the components referred to in Article 13 (a), (c), (c) and (e);
d. The pressure or temperature sensor referred to in Article 13, third paragraph (e), with the components referred to in Article 13 (c), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g) and (j), and with the components mentioned in Article 13 (a), (c), (c) and (d).
(1) The supply of the components of the CNG system and its installation shall be carried out by the same supplier.
(2) Construction shall be carried out in accordance with the construction drawings referred to in Article 12, fourth or fifth paragraph.
3. The components of the CNG system shall be duly confirmed.
4. The CNG system does not show any leakage.
5. The CNG system shall be installed in such a way that the protection against damage is optimal.
6. No part of the CNG system is within a distance of 0,1 m from an outlet or a similar heat source, unless the part is adequately protected against the heat by means of a shield.
(7) Nothing connected to the CNG system which has no connection with the proper and safe operation of the propulsion engine.
(8) The components, referred to in Article 14, shall be incorporated in such a way that the verification is simple and that the marks are legible.
(1) If, due to the failure of a component of the CNG system, another component of the CNG system can be supercharged above the design pressure, a pressure protection device shall be installed to ensure that the gas supply to it as a result of the failure is too high In the case of a section, it shall automatically close The valve is located in a part of the installation which cannot be overloaded due to excessive pressure.
2. An automatic shut-off valve shuts down the fuel supply unless the engine turns or is started.
3. An automatic shut-off valve shuts down the fuel supply, if the gas pressure for the engine becomes too high. The gas pressure shall be monitored by means of a pressure switch or an instrument with the same effect. The adjustment is such that the gas pressure is safe, but sufficiently high to allow the engine to keep the gas stable and almost completely burned.
1. CNG tanks shall not be located in the engine chamber.
2. Mounts on CNG tanks are located in the space in which the CNG tanks are placed.
3. The space in which the CNG tanks are placed shall be sufficiently ventilated. The air inlet is located on one side of the top of the room. The suction channel is not more than 50 mm from the bottom, diagonally to the air inlet on the other side of the room.
4. The ventilation openings in the space in which the CNG tanks have been placed are provided with flame-churned rosters approved by the Minister.
5. The capacity of the ventilation is sufficient to completely refresh the air in the space at least 20 times per hour.
6. The ventilation system shall be conducted in such a way as to exclude spark-formation and electrostatic charging.
7. Ventilation holes on the outside of the roundboat for the purpose of the air inlet are located at the top of the building.
8. The capacity of the CNG tanks shall not be greater than required for a single day trip.
9. The main cranes of the CNG tanks can be closed from the steering position.
10. CNG tanks were approved at the most recent periodic inspection, as referred to in Article 32, third paragraph.
1. The overpressure protection device is fitted to the container in the CNG container or in an appendage.
2. The functioning of the appendage does not obstruct the functioning of the overpressure security.
3. Any excess pressure shall be discharged directly outwit and shall not be dialled at any lower point than on the upper side of the build-up.
1. The automatic shut-off valve is applied to the CNG container.
2. The automatic shut-off valve has been carried out:
a. As a single component in which an automatic shut-off valve and a manual valve is accommodated, if appropriate also with an overpressure protection device; or
b. As a combination of two components consisting of a manual tank valve, whether or not fitted with an overpressure protection valve, and an automatic shut-off valve, where the manual valve directly after the CNG tank and the automatic shut-off valve is applied to the manual valve.
1. In the gas pipeline of the CNG container to the pressure regulator, an automatic shut-off valve is installed as close as possible to the pressure regulator.
2. If multiple pressure controls are applied, the automatic shut-off valve can be placed for the last pressure regulator.
Article 19, third to seventh paragraph, shall apply mutatis mutandis to the space in which the propulsion engine of a cruise boat of the Amsterdam grachtet type, equipped with a CNG system, has been installed.
1. A gas detection system shall be installed in areas where CNG leakage may occur.
2. The gas detection system shall provide optical and acoustic alarms near the steering position if the amount of CNG in the space reaches 10 per cent of the lower explosion limit.
(3) The gas detection system was verified at the latest six months ago and was found to be correct and in order.
1. No flanges or couplings shall be located in the part of the gas supply line of the CNG tanks to the engine, affixed to the passenger compartment.
2. The part of the gas supply line from the CNG tanks to the engine mounted under the passenger compartment shall be located in a sufficiently ventilated mantelpipe.
(1) The manometer is installed in the part of the CNG system where the unscheduled tank pressure can be measured.
2. The manometer is easily legible.
The filling-closure of a CNG container shall be:
a. shall be located in the atmosphere in the outside air; and
b. is protected from dirt and water.
(1) A CNG gas pipeline in which the pressure may exceed 2500 Kpa:
a. has an external diameter of not more than 12 mm;
b. Is of seamless stainless steel; and
c. meets the ISO 2604-2 standards applicable at the time of installation for such gas lines.
2. A CNG gas line in which the pressure can exceed 50 Kpa:
a. Is seamless stainless steel or seamless copper;
b. has an external diameter of not more than 12 mm; and
c. has a wall thickness of at least 0,8 mm.
3. In respect of a stainless steel gas pipe referred to in paragraph 1, an inspection certificate shall be provided in accordance with the EN-EN 10204-3.1.B standards applicable at the time of issue of the certificate, or an equivalent test report.
(4) If the use of gas pipelines is not possible for reasons of construction, it is permissible to use short distances from gas hoses approved by the Minister.
5. Gasslangen were produced no longer than one year ago. If only the production year is indicated, 31 December of that year shall be as the production date.
1. CNG gas pipelines shall not be fitted with aluminium fasteners or by welding or soldering.
2. Gas pipes are not subject to voltage or vibration different from those of the interior ship itself.
3. Gasslangen are not subject to tension.
4. Stainless steel gas piping shall be incorporated with at least every 0.60 m a fixing point.
5. Copying gas lines shall be incorporated with at least every 0.40 m a fixing point.
6. On mounting points, the gas line is equipped with protective material.
1. Gas-feeding solder compounds and gas-feeding cutting ring compounds in CNG gas pipelines shall not be permitted.
2. Stainless steel gas lines are connected by stainless steel fittings.
3. Lascompounds of stainless steel gas pipelines shall be authorised if X-ray examinations have shown that the compounds are safe, according to a certificate issued by the Minister, approved for that purpose.
4. Copying gas pipes are connected through a fitting of corrosion-resistant metal.
5. Sub-blocks are of corrosion-resistant metal.
6. Stals gas pipelines are connected by means of appropriate bottlenring joints.
7. Copying gas lines shall be connected by means of appropriate double-conical rings or double flanges.
8. The number of connections is as small as possible.
9. The connections shall be in an accessible place.
(1) The CNG system shall have no more than two hand valves.
2. A hand-held valve shall serve as:
a. Additional safety valve; or
b. Test shutter.
3. The manual valve, referred to in paragraph 2 (a), is mounted for the automatic shut-off valve.
4. The manual valve referred to in paragraph 2 (b) shall be adequately protected against use by unauthorised persons.
1. The maintenance of the CNG system shall be in accordance with a maintenance programme agreed with the manufacturer or the supplier of the CNG system.
2. The maintenance programme shall at least provide for regular monitoring of the CNG system.
3. The maintenance programme shall provide for a periodic inspection of the CNG tanks and shall specify the test method to be applied and the identification criteria.
(4) A copy of the description of the maintenance programme shall be sent to the Minister within three months of the implementation of the CNG system.
(5) The Minister may adjust the maintenance programme to the extent that implementation of the maintenance programme ensures the safety of the use of the CNG system in its reasonable judgment.
(6) The results of a check referred to in paragraph 2 and the results of a periodic inspection referred to in paragraph 3 shall be recorded in the description of the maintenance programme, indicating the date on which the checks were carried out. whether the approval has been held or terminated and the name of the person under whose responsibility the check or inspection has taken place. It shall sign the note.
(7) Where a CNG container is rejected in whole or in part, the owner shall immediately inform the Minister thereof.
8. The description of the maintenance program is on board.
1. The view from the steering position is sufficiently free in all directions.
2. The view to the rear can be made with the help of reliable optical tools.
For the immersion pump, a capacity of 3000 l/hour is sufficient.
1. Articles 6, 9, 10, first paragraph, 11 and 12, first and second paragraphs, of this Annex shall not apply to the examination of roundboats whose date of commencement of construction is situated on 22 December 1990, provided that facilities are those who, in the reasonable judgment of the Minister, provide sufficient guarantees for the safety of the ship and the persons on board, or in accordance with the reasonable judgment of the Minister in accordance with the competent district head of the provide a sufficient guarantee for the safety, health and welfare of the labour force on board.
(2) If, on a cruise ship whose time of commencement of construction is situated before 22 December 1990, the rules laid down in Article 5 are not complied with, the Secretary of State may either enter the maximum number of passengers on the ship or enter the space in question. Limit.
3. Articles 12, fourth and sixth paragraph, 17, first and second paragraphs, and 32 third paragraph shall not apply to roundboats whose date of commencement of construction is to be located before 1 July 1996.
4. Articles 12, fifth and sixth paragraph, 17, first and second paragraphs, and 32, third paragraph, shall not apply to round-trip vessels of which the date of commencement of the installation of the CNG system is to be located before 1 July 1996.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
Without prejudice to the requirements laid down in this Annex, open excursion boats shall comply with Annex II of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC except for the first to fifth paragraphs of Articles 3.03, 3.04, second to seventh paragraph, 8.04, in so far as it concerns open excursion boats with outboard engines, 8.05, first and thirteenth paragraph, 8.08, 10.01, 10.02, 10.03, first paragraph, 10.05, first and second paragraphs, 11.08, 11.04, 11.02, second and fourth paragraphs, 15.05, 15.05, 15.06, first paragraph, point (b), fourth paragraph, point (f), 11th paragraph, and seventeenth member, 15.09, 15.10, second to seventh paragraph of Directive, 15.11, seventeenth member, and 15.12.
1. Open excursion boats of more than 10 metres in length on the longitudinal waterline shall be fitted with a watertight collision bulkhead, at least 0,10 m and not more than 0,60 m behind the pre-lead line. The ship shall be sealed with a watertight deck for this collision bulkhead.
2. For wooden open vessels used for navigation on the inland waterways of zone 4, a derogation from that provided for in paragraph 1 may be made.
3. On open cruise boats with a dedicated propulsion engine in the ship, this engine is wholly enclosed by a flame retardant.
(1) In the case of open excursion boats on inland waterways of zone 3, the Minister may provide that they have sufficient reserve buoyancy after full run. This reserve buoyancy shall be considered to be sufficient if the ship still has a freeboard of at least 0,05 m in full-flight condition.
2. In the case of open excursion boats with the exception of the gangways in whole, fitted with fixed seating benches, the following derogations from the requirements of 15.03 of Annex II to this Regulation may be used for the use on certain inland waterways of zone 4. Directive 2006 /87/EC shall be granted:
a. The influence of wind pressure and a centrifugal force caused by agitator need not be taken into account;
(b) for the transverse movement of half of the number of persons authorised, a fourth part of the authorized number of persons may be assumed to be placed on a final ship's side and a fourth part of the authorized number of persons may be taken into account. persons on the centre of the ship. A lower remaining free board and a lower residual safety distance may be permitted.
In the case of open excursion boats, derogation from Article 15.04 (1) of Annex II to this Regulation may be waived. Directive 2006 /87/EC shall be granted.
(1) The maximum number of passengers permitted shall be determined in such a way as to ensure compliance with the stability and free board requirements.
(2) The maximum number of passengers allowed shall not exceed the number of seats available to passengers.
3. For the seating positions, a width of at least 0,40 m per person shall be counted.
On open excursion boats, when used on inland waterways of the zone 4, the parts of decks not closed to passengers shall be closed, which are fully occupied with transversal fixed seats, provided with fixed differences or railings at a height of at least 0,30 m, measured above the seat of the bank.
1. On open excursion boats with a build up, a free mid-path is present for the entire length of the part of the passenger compartment. This median path shall have a width of not less than 0,45 m.
2. An exit with a free width of not less than 0,50 m shall be available on open excursion boats with a structure both on the front and on the rear of the passenger. One of the exits may be replaced by two emergency exits, each with a free passage of at least 0,60 cm. width and at least 0,80 cm. height.
3. The boarding and boarding of passengers shall be carried out in a safe manner. If necessary, handholds and step steps shall be applied.
1. On open excursion boats, for outboard engines, fuel may be used with a flash point of 55 ° C or less.
2. In the case referred to in the first paragraph, the fuel tank shall not have a content greater than 25 litres. The tank shall be located outside the part of the passenger compartment.
3. In case of an electrically driven propulsion, the accubatteries are covered on the top surface so that they are protected from contact, falling objects and druipwater.
1. At least two suitable hay vessels shall be present on open excursion boats of a length of 7 metres or less on the longitudinal line.
2. Open roundboat boats with a length of more than 7 meters on the length waterline are provided from a handlepump. For a length of 12 metres or less on the longitudinal waterline, the diameter of the connector is at least 38 mm and at least 50 mm for a length above 12 metres.
Open excursion boats shall, when used on the inland waterways of zone 3, have an anchor with anchor tros of sufficient length for the water in question. The weight of this anchor shall be at least 25 kg.
1. At least one rescue buoy may be provided by a maximum number of passengers of 25 or less, and at least two rescue buoys are present at a number of more than 25. The rescue cuffs shall be equipped with a length of at least 20 metres in length and shall be stowed so as to be ready for immediate use.
2. For all passengers, individual or collective rescue agents are on board. Floating seat cushions shall be regarded as a rescue agent if they:
a. A carrying capacity in fresh water of not less than 7,5 kg;
b. To withstand oil, oil products, and temperatures up to 50 °C;
c. to be from a grab line and
d. Not attached to the ship.
(3) An exemption from the provisions of the second paragraph may be granted in respect of open cruise boats for use in certain inland waters of zone 4.
In the vicinity of the engine installation, a portable extinguisher with a fluid fire extinguishing agent and a filling mass of not less than 4 kg shall be present.
On board, at least the following equipment shall be available in usable condition:
a. A fair-boat/boat jaw;
b. A dressor kit, Model B;
c. sufficient troxes for lakes and towing;
d. If, between sunset and sunrise, hazards are: a suitable portable electric lantern in waterproof execution.
1. Articles 2, 9, second paragraph, second sentence, and 10 shall not apply in the case of the examination of roundboat vessels the time of the construction of which is situated before 22 December 1990, provided that facilities have been taken to ensure that they are reasonably well established. the Minister's discretion to ensure the safety of the ship and the persons on board, or to the reasonable judgement of the Minister in accordance with the competent district head of the Labour Inspectorate, to provide sufficient guarantee for safety, health and well-being in relation to work on board.
(2) If the requirements of Article 7 are not complied with on a cruise ship the date of commencement of construction of 22 December 1990 does not comply with the requirements of Article 7, the Minister may grant a derogation from the maximum permitted number of vessels. passengers on the ship or in the area concerned, provided that facilities which, according to the Minister's reasonable view, provide adequate security for the safety of the ship and the persons on board.
3. Articles included in Column 2 of Article 11.02 of Annex III to the Act of Inland Creation are, in addition to Article 42, second paragraph, of the Act of Inland Creation not applicable for the examination of existing cruise boats when used on certain inland waterways of zone 4, in accordance with Article 3, second paragraph, and 7 of this Arrangement, subject to the reasonable judgment of the Minister there is no reason to doubt the safety of the persons on board and to the stability of the loaded vessel, and that the circumstances which have been accepted under previous local regulations shall apply.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
This Annex shall apply to the waters of areas 3 and 4 situated within the provinces of Friesland, Groningen and Drenthe.
1. Notwithstanding the requirements set out in this Annex, skûtsjes in Chapters 3 to 15a of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
(2) Article 15.06 (1) (a) of Annex II to the Directive shall not apply to skûtsjes.
1. On both sides of the ship, a handrail is installed over the complete length of the hatch cover.
2. At regular distances are gripping lines across the hatch edge tense.
3. seats on the crooks are placed on the crooks.
4. During the voyage, the wearing of a lifejacket is mandatory. This commandment is affixed to the ship on a plate on one for each clearly visible place.
5. The dime cap is marked with a marking of the limit where the height of the boom above the highest part of the hatch cap is at least 0,80 m. In the vicinity of this marking, a signboard bearing the inscription 'Not accessible to passengers' is clearly marked for each of them.
For the use of outboard engines, fuel tanks of these engines are located on or off the ship so that they cannot shift and fuel cannot gather in the ship.
1. Commercial passenger transport is allowed only in the period from 1 May to 30 September.
2. A sailing trip with passengers is up to two and a half hours.
(3) The certificate shall state the requirements referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2.
4. In addition to the Chapter 5 Minimum crew shall be two additional crew members on board equipped with a service booklet.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
The conceptual provisions set out in Article 1.01 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC shall apply mutatis mutandis to this Annex.
Without prejudice to the provisions of this Annex, ferries to Chapters 3 to 15 and Chapter 24a of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC, with the exception of the following articles in the Directive:
a. 3.03, first to fifth paragraphs;
b. 4.01 to 4.03;
(c) Chapter 5;
d. Only for non-free-feral ferries, Chapter 6;
e. 7.02, 7.09, 7.10 and 7.11;
f. solely for spring punching with an external propellant motor, 10.02, first paragraph, part d;
g. 10.02, second paragraph, part d, and 10.04, first paragraph;
h. 11.13;
i. only in so far as passenger spaces are concerned, 12.02, fourth to sixth paragraphs, and eighth to eleventh members;
j. 15.02, second to the thirteenth member, 15.03, 15.04 and 15.05, second paragraph;
k. only as regards height, 15.06, third paragraph, part c, and fifth paragraph, part b;
l. 15.06, seventh, eighth and seventeenth member, 15.08, second, third and fifth to ninth paragraphs, 15.09, tenth paragraph, and 15.11, sixteenth paragraph;
m. for spring punching only in zone 4, 15.11, seventeenth member; and
n. 15.12, second to tenth members.
1. In addition to the bulkheads prescribed in Article 2.6, the transverse bulkheads required by the leakage calculation according to Article 3.1 shall be present. These transverse bulkheads shall be watertight and shall be raised to the bulkhead deck. In the absence of a bulkhead deck, it shall be lifted up to the top of the vessel from which the freeboard is measured.
2. The spaces reserved for passengers shall be separated by watertight bulkheads of the machinery spaces, boiler rooms and cargo spaces.
(1) The number of openings prescribed in the bulkheads prescribed in accordance with Article 2.1 shall be kept as low as is permissible according to the method of construction and normal operation of the ship. The watertight function of the bulkheads shall not be adversely affected by the openings. No openings and doors shall be permitted in the collision bulkhead. In bulkheads designed to separate the rooms for passengers of machinery spaces, doors shall not be allowed.
2. Hand-operated watertight doors that cannot be operated remotely shall be permitted only in places that are not accessible to passengers. They are only opened for a brief period of time and are still constantly closed. On both sides of the doors, the marking shall be marked: 'Door closing immediately'. The rapid and safe closure of suitable devices shall be ensured.
(3) For hours which must be open for a longer period of time or which are located in places accessible to passengers, both on the spot on both sides of the bulkhead and from a well-accessible place above the bulkhead deck, closed. After closure by the remote control, the door shall be able to be re-opened on the spot and closed safely. The duration of the conclusion is sufficient to prevent accidents, but is not more than 60 seconds. Immediately before and during the closing, an audible alarm signal is automatically given at the door. The door and alarm signal shall also be capable of being operated independently of the board network. On the spot of the remote control, the door shall be indicated as to whether the door is open or closed.
4. All doors in bulkheads and their controls are located in a safe zone. This zone shall be bounded outwit by vertical planes which, at a distance of 1/5 from the width waterline parallel to the skin plating, are measured on the line of the largest inzinking.
1. Pipelines with open exhaust monings and ventilation ducts are so constructed that it cannot flow from one compartment to another or tank into water in the condition of the ship.
2. If different departments are in open compound via pipelines or ventilation ducts, they shall be managed at a suitable place up to the most unfavourable load line in a flat condition. Where this is not the case in the case of pipelines, the piping shall be fitted to the pierced bulkheads that can be operated from above the bulkhead deck.
3. Where a pipeline within a department does not have an open extradition, the pipeline is considered to be undamaged in the event of damage to this section if it runs within the safe zone defined in Article 2.2, fourth paragraph, and the distance to the ship floor is more than 0,50 m.
4. Cable-related events shall be performed in such a way that the tightness of the bulkheads is not affected.
In a cross-section, it shall be permitted to make a jump or recess, provided that all parts of the jump are located within the safe area referred to in Article 2.2, fourth paragraph.
If the openings and doors referred to in Article 2.2 are permitted, the certificate shall include the following business requirement:
'The staff shall ensure that all openings and doors in watertight bulkheads are watertight in case of danger without undue delay.'
(1) The following watertight bulkheads, which reach to the deck or, when there is no deck, to the top of the shipboard, shall be fitted:
a. An initial shot at a reasonable distance from the front steven;
b. A rear peak bulkhead at a reasonable distance from the stern.
2. On ships having a length of 25 m or less, it is permissible to omit the back-peak bulkhead.
1. For spring punching, the buoyancy in the event of leakage for all the expected load conditions shall be considered sufficient if the following requirements are met:
a. The vessel complies with the single-compartment standard. This means that the positioning of the watertight bulkheads is such that the ship does not sink beyond the internal line of the indomed line after flooding of any watertight section and that part f is complied with. The leakage calculation shall take into account the nature of the construction, such as asymmetrical spaces;
b. As an indomed border line, a line on the ship's side shall be assumed to be at least 10 cm below the bulkhead deck, below the lowest unwatertight point of the shipboard, respectively. Watertight windows are permitted under the indomed line when they cannot be opened and are sufficiently strong.
Where a continuous bulkhead deck is missing, a continuous immersion line shall be adopted to settle the first paragraph at least 10 cm below the lowest point where the shipowned and the bulkheads are no longer be watertight;
c. In general, a permeability of 95% is counted.
If a calculation can show that the average permeability of a particular compartment is less than 95%, that calculated value may be applied. The value of permeability is not allowed to be lower than:
1 °. for passenger and crew quarters: 95%;
2 °. for machinery spaces and ketelrooms: 85%;
3 °. for loading, baggage and sample printing: 75%;
4 °. for double-bottoms, oil bunkers and other tanks, depending on which tanks are intended to be loaded on the unloaded ship as full or empty according to their destination: 0 or 95%;
d. Between the collision bulkhead and the back-peak bulkhead, the watertight section, as referred to in subparagraph (a), shall be regarded as only those spaces having a length of at least 10% of the length-of-water line, but not less than 4 m.
If a watertight section is longer than prescribed and subdivided in such a way that watertight subdivisions have been formed, between which the least length is also present, it shall be permitted to use it for the purposes of leakage calculation. to take into account;
e. It is permitted that the length of the first section behind the collision bulkhead is less than 10% of the longitudinal waterline or 4 m.
In this case, the pre-peak and subsequent section shall be considered as being filled in at the same time when the leakage calculation is used. The distance, measured between the lead line through the foremost intersection of the ship hull with the plane of the greatest inzinking (preline) and the rear transverse bulkhead of the first section behind the collision bulkhead, shall not be less than 10% of the distance of the vehicle. Longitudinal waterline or 4 m.
The distance between the collision bulkhead and the pre-lead line shall not be less than 4% of the longitudinal waterline and not more than 4% of the length Lwl plus 2 m;
f. The arithmetic evidence of sufficient stability in flat condition shall be deemed to be satisfied if it is shown that for all stages of the discharge and for the final condition of being fulfilled, the founding moment Ma is greater than The moment of Mk. Ma is calculated using the formula:
Ma = MGrest. sin Ï.V
In this formula:
MGrest: the reduced metacenter height in flat condition in m;
(i) the angle at which the first opening of the non-filled compartments makes water, or where it is less the angle in which the bulkhead deck is to be water;
V: the displacement of water in tonnes.
Mk is calculated using the formula;
Mk = 0.2.Mp
where Mp is calculated according to the following formula:
Mp = 0,15 b.G.
In this formula:
b: the largest useful width of the relevant deck, measured at a height of 0,5 m;
G: the total weight of the number of persons permitted on that deck.
(2) The first paragraph shall not apply to spring ponts constructed or intended for the carriage of only persons including vehicles on two wheels, with a length of less than 15 m in the zone 3 and having a length-of-water line Less than 25 m in the zone 4.
(3) The smallest lengths of watertight divisions prescribed in paragraph 1 (d) and (e) shall not apply to spring punching of less than 25 m the length of the watertight line.
4. Those spring punching not fitted with a solid deck shall be fitted on the sides of the box in such a way that, in the event of a leak, the reserve buoyancy shall be provided with equivalent safety.
(1) The proof of sufficient stability shall be furnished by the production of a calculation based on the results of a slope test and, where the inspector general so requires, of a turning point test.
2. In the case of ships with a length-of-water line not exceeding 25 m, sufficient stability, rather than by the arithmetic evidence referred to in paragraph 3, may be demonstrated by a stability test of the weight of half of the authorized number of vessels. persons. This test shall be carried out at the worst filling of the fuel and drinking water tanks.
The weight of half the number of persons permitted shall be moved to the ship's side by the part of the deck intended for passengers, and a density of 3 3/4 per m in the vessel. 2 , corresponding to 285 kg per m 2 , it is obtained.
In the case of this test, the heel is not more than 7 degrees after moving. The remaining freeboard and the remaining safety distance shall not be less than 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,20 m and 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,10 m, respectively.
(3) The arithmetical evidence of sufficient stability shall be deemed to be satisfied if it is found that the impact of the ship in the loading conditions referred to in Article 4.2 and the simultaneous influence of the vessel referred to in Article 4.3 is fulfilled. Moments are not more than 12 degrees.
4. The simultaneous impact of the transverse displacement of persons and of the load on vehicles shall not exceed 10 degrees.
5. At the time referred to in paragraph 3, residual release and residual safety distance as referred to in Article 5.1 shall be present.
6. For spring punching which is constructed or intended for the carriage of only persons including vehicles on two wheels, with a length Length waterline not exceeding 25 m can be sufficiently stable, rather than by the arithmetic proof shall be demonstrated by a stability test as referred to in the second paragraph.
7. The remaining free-board and residual safety distance criteria referred to in paragraph 2 shall apply to spring ponts in Zones 3 and 4. In the case of spring ponting in zone 2, the remaining release of the free board and the remaining safety distance referred to there shall not be less than 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,25 m and 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,15 m, respectively.
1. The full equipment, all crew members and the maximum permitted number of passengers shall be included. The fuel and drinking water tanks are approved half-filled.
2. In the case of spring punching, which are constructed or intended for the service of persons as well as vehicles having more than two wheels, the weight of vehicles and their loads to be used for the calculation referred to in Article 4.1, third paragraph, shall be added: determined by reducing the load capacity referred to in Article 5.2, second paragraph, by the weight of the full equipment, all crew members, the maximum permitted number of passengers and the maximum content of fuel and drinking water tanks.
(3) The weight of the vehicles and their cargo shall be distributed over the ferry in proportion to the available deck space and in accordance with the nature of the vehicles to be used on them.
4. Where a ferry has two or more set strips, it shall also be counted on the weight of vehicles and their load and their distribution according to the provisions of Article 4.5.
5. For the height of the centre of gravity of vehicles and their load, above the driving deck shall be equal to 0,80 m in the case of passenger cars and by 2,00 m for lorries, buses and the like.
(6) For the loading conditions referred to in paragraphs 3 and 4, a trimmer calculation shall be made for the most unfavourable condition in which the heaviest vehicle allowed on the ferry is located during the on-and off-drive at the end of the carriageway, or is on the load valve.
1. For spring punching, the simultaneous influence of the centerching moments is counted as a result of:
a. A transverse displacement of the maximum authorised number of persons as referred to in Article 4.4;
b. A wind pressure as referred to in the third paragraph;
c. A centrifugal force caused by agitator, as referred to in the fourth paragraph;
d. A load with vehicles as referred to in Article 4.5.
2. For non-free-feral spring ponts, it is not necessary to include a right-wing moment due to a centrifugal force caused by agitator.
3. The cating moment Mw caused by the impact of the wind pressure, is calculated using the formula: Mw = Pw. F. (hw + T/2)
In this formula:
pw: specific wind pressure
for zone 2: 20 kg/m 2 ;
for zone 3: 10 kg/m 2 ;
for zone 4: 10 kg/m 2 ;
F: the lateral surface area of the ship above the plane of the greatest breakdown in m 2 ;
hw: the distance from the centre of gravity of the lateral surface F above the plane of the greatest inzinking in m;
T: the average depth to the plane of the largest inzinking in m.
4. The cating moment Mdr caused by the centrifugal force at stirring is calculated using the formula:
Mdr = 0,5. D/Lwl. (GK-T/2)
In this formula:
D: displacement of the loaded vessel into tonnes;
Lwl: the length, measured in the area of the greatest breakdown:
GK: the distance from the weight point point of the loaded ship to the top of the keel in m;
T: the average depth to the plane of the largest inzinking in m.
If the cargo of the loaded vessel is determined in the turning circle, the value thus obtained shall be counted as calculated. This test shall be carried out at half the speed of the ship, in the case of full load and at the lowest diameter of the turning circle as it is at the time of the loading.
1. The starting point for the calculation is the location of the total center of gravity of the passengers on the heart ship.
2. For the calculation of the moment, a movement of all passengers from a heart ship is assumed to that side of the ship, with the arm of the moment being greatest. It includes a density of 3,75 persons per metre. 2 The front surface of the headlamp. For the occupancy of seat benches, per passenger with a width of 0,50 m and a seating depth of 0,75 m is counted.
(3) By way of derogation from the second paragraph, in the case of ferries having two or more strips of interest, if this gives rise to less favourable results, the movement of persons shall be regarded as the same ship's side as the placing of the goods on the same ship's side. vehicles as referred to in Article 4.5.
(1) Where a spring ferry which is built or intended for the commercial transport of persons and of vehicles on more than two wheels and which maintains a ferry service by inland waterway in zones 2, 3 and 4, has two or more set-up strips, For stability, a percentage of the maximum authorised weight of vehicles and their load shall be unsymmetrically drawn into account depending on the number of adjustment strips. This percentage shall be:
a. In the case of two set strips: 50%, to be counted on one of the adjustment strips;
b. In the case of three set-off strips, 67%, equally divided between two adjacent strips;
c. In the case of four strips: 75%, equally divided between three set of strips adjacent to each other.
2. In the case of more than four strips, the Minister shall determine the percentage to be charged.
1. In the case of the ferry ferry caused by the periods referred to in Article 4.3, a residual freeboard and a residual safety distance shall be present in accordance with the provisions of the second and third paragraphs.
2. In the case of a spring punching which is watertight and sufficiently strong in the shipowned shell or windows, and all openings in the shipower are secured against any undesired penetration of water, the remaining freeboard shall be at least 0,20 m. For the tripled state as referred to in Article 4.2 (6), the remaining free board may be reduced to 0,10 m at the end of the ferry.
3. In the case of spring punching where the patrolling gates or windows can be opened in the ship 's house or where unsecured openings are present in the ship' s skin, the remaining safety distance to those openings shall be at least 0,10 m. In this case, in addition, the remaining freeboard shall be at least 0,20 m.
1. The freeboard shall be at least equal to the sum of:
a. the breakdown, calculated along the shudting shell, calculated in accordance with the provisions of Articles 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3; and
b. Remaining Freeboard as referred to in Article 5.1.
2. The freeboard shall be for spring ponting in zones 3 and 4 at least 0,30 m. For spring ponting in zone 2, the freeboard shall be at least 0,40 m.
3. The safety distance shall be at least equal to the sum of:
a. Insertion of the embarkation measured along the shudted shell, as calculated by the heel calculated in accordance with Articles 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3; and
b. the residual safety distance referred to in Article 5.1.
4. The safety distance shall not be less than:
a. To openings that are not watertight:
1 °. in Zone 2: 0,60 m;
2 °. in zone 3: 0,30 m;
3 °. in zone 4: 0,30 m;
b. To the underside of stalkate gates and windows that are located in the ship ' s house and which can be opened:
1 °. in Zone 2: 0,30 m;
2 °. in zone 3: 0,25 m;
3 °. in zone 4: 0,20 m;
c. For open spring ponting services without a bulkhead deck, to the lowest point of the top of the board:
1 °. in Zone 2: 0,80 m;
2 °. in zone 3: 0,50 m;
3 °. in zone 4: 0,40 m;
d. For unsinkable open spring-to-ship ferries on site of the valve, provided that it is watertight in a closed state along the standing edges and the underside:
1 °. in Zone 2: 0,60 m;
2 °. in zone 3: 0,40 m;
3 °. in zone 4: 0,30 m.
(1) The plane of the greatest breakdown shall be established in such a way as to satisfy both the requirements laid down in Articles 4.1 to 5.2 and the applicable requirements of Articles 2.1 to 5.2.
(2) The Minister may, for a particular ferry or for a given vessel, determine for safety reasons a greater freeboard or a greater distance of safety if it considers that it is necessary for safety reasons.
(3) The carrying capacity of the greatest breakdown referred to in paragraph 1 shall be determined by arithmetic based on the results of a sloping test or, for the purpose of a ferry as referred to in Article 4.1, sixth member, based on the results of a stability test.
(1) The plane of the greatest breakdown shall be established in such a way as to satisfy both the requirements laid down in Articles 4.1 to 5.2 and the applicable requirements of Articles 2.1 to 5.2.
(2) For the calculation of the maximum number of passengers permitted, the sum shall be taken from the free portions of the headway surfaces normally intended for passengers. It shall not include sleeping quarters and toilets, as well as those spaces which are permanent or temporary for the operation of the ship, even if they are accessible to passengers. In addition, the spaces under the main deck shall not be taken into account. In the main deck, rooms with large windows with upper deck windows may be taken into account.
3. to be deducted from the sum of the surfaces calculated according to the second paragraph:
a. The surfaces of corridors, staircases and other connecting roads;
b. The surfaces under stairs;
c. The surfaces that are permanently occupied by equipment and furniture; and
d. Surfaces under tugs, rescue boats, rescue rafts and the like, even when placed so high, that the passengers can stop underneath them.
(4) The maximum number of passengers permitted shall be calculated by multiplying the number of square metres of the clearance level determined according to the second and third paragraphs by the factor of 2,5. In the case of ships of less than 25 metres length lwl, this factor may be fixed at 2.8.
1. The decks accessible to passengers, land corridors and the driving decks shall be constructed in such a manner as to impose a uniform load of not less than 4000 N/m 2 can wear.
2. The decks, loading valves and the like for vehicles shall also be calculated for the maximum permissible axle loads and wheel pressures.
(3) The permissible stresses in the structure shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of an approved investigation bureau.
4. Non-liberating spring ponts shall be constructed and arranged in such a way as to ensure the safety of navigation. They must be able to be safely stopped immediately.
Ropes, drums, transfers and similar devices are placed and shielded in such a way that they do not constitute a hazard to passengers and crew.
5. Open decks are provided with sufficient spout capability to quickly drain the overcoming water and rainwater.
6. The decks intended for vehicles on more than two wheels shall have at least an available width b in mm according to the following formulae:
a. With raised footpaths (vances, pavements), with a width of 0 to 450 mm:
b = r. n + 500
b. Measurements between the walls, various walls, fencing or stern, with elevated paths (vanes, pavements), of a width of 450 mm or more:
b = r. (n-2) + 2. s measured between the standing edges of the footpaths (soups, pavements), it being understood that b is only a single adjustment strip between the edges of the pedestal and the edges are 5 mm.
In these formulae:
n: the number of adjustment strips,
r: width adjustment strip for passenger cars of 2150 mm, for lorries, buses and similar vehicles 3050 mm,
s: width adjustment strip for passenger cars 1950 mm, for lorries, buses and similar vehicles 2850 mm.
The sizes r and s apply to a height from the 2000 mm driving deck for passenger cars and 3000 mm for lorries, buses and other buses.
Where marking on the vehicles intended for vehicles is marked, the marking of the marking shall be:
a. If a deck has more than two marked adjustment strips, the end marker stripes of the outer strips shall be at least 2400 mm for passenger cars and 3300 mm for lorries, buses and the like of a wall; To be in a different kind of fencing or fencing.
However, for the presence of an increased footpath, sidewalks, or pavement, the distance from the marker line to the standing edge must also be at least 50 mm and 2850 mm. The width of the adjustment strips is measured at the heart of the marker stripes.
Provided that the marker stripes are clearly distinguished, different layouts for different types of vehicles are possible.
b. In places where existing structures cannot be satisfied by the minimum width required under (a), a restraining prohibition. This is indicated by markings on the deck.
7. The maximum permissible axle load and wheel pressure shall be clearly visible in a suitable place except where the deck is constructed for all vehicles authorised according to the Road Traffic Regulation.
1. On the spring ponts in Zones 3 and 4, it is permissible to replace the prescribed rescue equipment with common rescue means.
2. By way of derogation from Article 15.09 (4) of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC, the Minister may allow less rescue funds to be placed on ferries in the zone 4, depending on the nature of the sailing water and the traffic conditions. In any case, for at least 25% of the maximum authorised number of passengers, rescue means shall be present on board.
Spring ponts constructed and equipped for the carriage of vehicles to more than two wheels shall be equipped with at least two portable fire extinguishers, at or in the immediate vicinity of the running deck. For this purpose, the portable extinguishers referred to in Article 10.03 and 15.12 (1) of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC shall be included.
On spring ponts with a longitudinal waterline of 35 m or more, speakers are present with which all passengers can be reached.
1. Clearly visible signs have been affixed on spring ponts intended for the carriage of vehicles to more than two wheels, on which instructions to drivers of vehicles have been clearly legibly placed with regard to the setting up of vehicles The engine, if fitted, and put the brake on the vehicle.
2. By means of markings and marking signs it is indicated that the use of exits, walkways and flight paths should not be obstructed by baggage, cycling and the like.
1. Free-fern spring ponting devices fitted to the front and aft ship with fully identical means of propulsion and steering shall be at least one anchor at each end of the vessel.
2. Non-release spring ponting to one of the ships is equipped with at least one anchor.
3. In cases mentioned in paragraphs 1 and 2, the total weight of anchors shall be at least P, the value of P being determined in accordance with the requirements of Article 10.01 (2) of Annex II to this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC.
4. each anchor is equipped with an anchor chain, tros or cable, whose length and breaking strength are determined according to the provisions for bow neckline chains, bunches or cables of articles 10.01, 10th and 11th paragraph of Annex II of this Regulation. Directive 2006 /87/EC.
In this case, the formula for the value P ' is to take the specific theoretical weight of the anchor concerned.
If the spring pont in unladen condition has a water displacement of more than 75m 3 a by-boat should be present.
The ship shall have sufficient hair and maneuver properties.
On non-free-feral ferries, the arrangement of the vehicles shall be such that the view during navigation is sufficient in all directions.
1. Articles 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 6.1, 7.1, first, second, third, fifth and sixth paragraphs, and 8.5 of this Annex shall not apply to the examination of ships which were in service before 1 January 1991, provided that facilities have been provided, who, in the opinion of the Minister, provide sufficient security for the safety of the ship and on the other, or in the opinion of the Minister, in accordance with the appropriate security of the Labour Inspectorate in accordance with the competent management director of the Labour Inspectorate. provide safety, health and well-being in connection with the work on board.
2. Articles 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of this Annex shall not apply to the examination of ships which were in service before 1 January 1991, except that the deck is sufficiently watertight and, in addition, to the opinion of the Minister, in accordance with the relevant labour inspectorate, there is no reason for doubt as to the stability of the laden ferry and that the circumstances of the existing existing provisions of the general police regulations and provincial regulations, from force until the moment of The entry into force of this scheme has been accepted.
(3) On spring ponts that have been provided with a certificate of research between 1 July 2009 and 1 January 2011, the following shall apply:
a. Annex 3.6 of the Inland waterway system as it was worded as of 31 December 2010;
b. This Annex, except:
1 °. Chapters 2 to 6;
2 °. only for non-freenferous ferries, Chapter 7;
3 °. Articles 8.5 and 9.3; and
4. Article 1.2 in respect of Articles 15.01, 15.05, first, third and fourth paragraphs, 15.06, first paragraph, second paragraph, third paragraph, parts a, b, d to g, fourth paragraph, fifth paragraph, part a, c to c, sixth paragraph, ninth to the Sixteenth and Nineteenth paragraphs, 15.07, 15.08, first and fourth paragraphs, 15.09, first to ninth and eleventh member, 15.10, 15.11, first to fifteenth and, only for zone 3, seventeenth paragraph, 15.12, first paragraph, and 15.13 to 15.9 with 15.15 of Directive 2006 /87/EC.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
The conceptual provisions set out in Article 1.01 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC shall apply mutatis mutandis to this Annex.
Without prejudice to the provisions of this Annex, ferries comply with Chapters 3 to 15 and Chapter 24a of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC with the exception of the articles:
4.01 to 4.03, 15.02, second to thirteenth member, 15.03, 15.04, 15.05, second paragraph, 15.07, 15.09, first paragraph, second subparagraph.
1. In addition to the bulkheads prescribed in Article 2.6, the transverse bulkheads shall be present, which shall be necessary on the basis of the leakage calculation provided for in Article 3.1. These transverse bulkheads shall be watertight and shall be raised to the bulkhead deck. In the absence of a bulkhead deck, it shall be lifted up to the top of the vessel from which the freeboard is measured.
2. The spaces reserved for passengers shall be separated by watertight bulkheads of the machinery spaces, boiler rooms and cargo spaces.
(1) The number of openings prescribed in the bulkheads prescribed in accordance with Article 2.1 shall be kept as low as is permissible according to the method of construction and normal operation of the ship. The watertight function of the bulkheads shall not be adversely affected by the openings. No openings and doors shall be permitted in the collision bulkhead. In bulkheads designed to separate the rooms for passengers of machinery spaces, doors shall not be allowed.
2. Hand-operated watertight doors that cannot be operated remotely shall be permitted only in places that are not accessible to passengers. They are only opened for a brief period of time and are still constantly closed. On both sides of the doors, the marking shall be marked: 'Door closing immediately'. The rapid and safe closure of suitable devices shall be ensured.
(3) For hours which must be open for a longer period of time or which are located in places accessible to passengers, both on the spot on both sides of the bulkhead and from a well-accessible place above the bulkhead deck, closed. After closure by the remote control, the door shall be able to be re-opened on the spot and closed safely. The duration of the conclusion is sufficient to prevent accidents, but is not more than 60 seconds. Immediately before and during the closing, an audible alarm signal is automatically given at the door. The door and alarm signal shall also be capable of being operated independently of the board network. On the spot of the remote control, the door shall be indicated as to whether the door is open or closed.
4. All doors in bulkheads and their controls are located in a safe zone. This zone shall be bounded outwit by vertical planes which, at a distance of 1/5 from the width waterline parallel to the skin plating, are measured on the line of the largest inzinking.
1. Pipelines with open exhaust monings and ventilation ducts are so constructed that it cannot flow from one compartment to another or tank into water in the condition of the ship.
2. If different departments are in open compound via pipelines or ventilation ducts, they shall be managed at a suitable place up to the most unfavourable load line in a flat condition. Where this is not the case in the case of pipelines, the piping shall be fitted to the pierced bulkheads that can be operated from above the bulkhead deck.
3. Where a pipeline within a department does not have an open extradition, the pipeline is considered to be undamaged in the event of damage to this section if it runs within the safe zone defined in Article 2.2, fourth paragraph, and the distance to the ship floor is more than 0,50 m.
4. Cable-related events shall be performed in such a way that the tightness of the bulkheads is not affected.
In a cross-section, it shall be permitted to make a jump or recess, provided that all parts of the jump are located within the safe area referred to in Article 2.2, fourth paragraph.
If the openings and doors referred to in Article 2.2 are permitted, the certificate shall include the following business requirement:
'The staff shall ensure that all openings and doors in watertight bulkheads are watertight in case of danger without undue delay.'
1. For ferries, the buoyancy in the event of leakage for all the expected load conditions shall be considered sufficient if the following requirements are met:
a. The vessel complies with the single-compartment standard. This means that the positioning of the watertight bulkheads is such that the ship does not sink beyond the internal line of the indomed line after flooding of any watertight section and that part f is complied with. The leakage calculation shall take into account the nature of the construction, such as asymmetrical spaces;
b. As an indomed border line, a line on the ship's side shall be assumed to be at least 10 cm below the bulkhead deck, below the lowest unwatertight point of the shipboard, respectively. Watertight windows are permitted under the indomed line when they cannot be opened and are sufficiently strong.
Where a continuous bulkhead deck is missing, a continuous immersion line shall be adopted to settle the first paragraph at least 10 cm below the lowest point where the shipowned and the bulkheads are no longer be watertight;
c. In general, a permeability of 95% is counted.
If a calculation can show that the average permeability of a particular compartment is less than 95%, that calculated value may be applied. The value of permeability is not allowed to be lower than:
1 °. for passenger and crew quarters: 95%;
2 °. for machinery spaces and ketelrooms: 85%;
3 °. for loading, baggage and sample printing: 75%;
4 °. for double-bottoms, oil bunkers and other tanks, depending on which tanks are intended to be loaded on the unloaded ship as full or empty according to their destination: 0 or 95%;
d. Between the collision bulkhead and the back-peak bulkhead, the watertight section, as referred to in subparagraph (a), shall be regarded as only those spaces having a length of at least 10% of the length-of-water line, but not less than 4 m.
If a watertight section is longer than prescribed and subdivided in such a way that watertight subdivisions have been formed, between which the least length is also present, it shall be permitted to use it for the purposes of leakage calculation. to take into account;
e. It is permitted that the length of the first section behind the collision bulkhead is less than 10% of the longitudinal waterline or 4 m.
In this case, the pre-peak and subsequent section shall be considered as being filled in at the same time when the leakage calculation is used. The distance, measured between the lead line through the foremost intersection of the ship hull with the plane of the greatest inzinking (preline) and the rear transverse bulkhead of the first section behind the collision bulkhead, shall not be less than 10% of the distance of the vehicle. Longitudinal waterline or 4 m.
The distance between the collision bulkhead and the pre-lead line shall not be less than 4% of the longitudinal waterline and not more than 4% of the length Lwl plus 2 m;
f. The arithmetic evidence of sufficient stability in flat condition shall be deemed to be satisfied if it is shown that for all stages of the discharge and for the final condition of being fulfilled, the founding moment Ma is greater than The moment of Mk. Ma is calculated using the formula:
Ma = MGrest. sin Ï.V
In this formula:
MGrest: the reduced metacenter height in flat condition in m;
(i) the angle at which the first opening of the non-filled compartments makes water, or where it is less the angle in which the bulkhead deck is to be water;
V: the displacement of water in tonnes.
Mk is calculated using the formula;
Mk = 0 ,2.Mp
where Mp is calculated according to the following formula:
Mp = 0,15 b.G.
In this formula:
b: the largest useful width of the relevant deck, measured at a height of 0,5 m;
G: the total weight of the number of persons permitted on that deck.
2. In determining the loading conditions, account shall be taken of the alleged condition in Article 2.2.
3. By way of derogation from the provisions of the first paragraph, the leakage calculation shall be based on the following amount of loading:
a. On the sides of the ship:
1 °. in the longitudinal direction 0,10 Lwl, however not less than 7,50 m,
2 °. in the width direction, measured horizontally in the plane of the largest break-in, 1,00 m,
3 °. in the elevation, counted from the base, uncapped;
b. In the plane of the ship:
1 °. in the longitudinal direction 0,10 Lwl, however not less than 7,50 m,
2 °. In the width direction 0,20 Bwl, however not less than 3,00 m,
3 °. in the altitudes 0,60 m, measured from the base.
In the case of bilge wells, the height shall be reduced to 0,50 m; in that case, the contents of a lens shall not exceed 0,05 m. 3 .
(4) All passing and transverse bulkheads, and decks and tank limits situated within the scope of the loading period referred to in paragraph 3 shall be classified as a leak.
5. In addition, irrespective of the amount of loading referred to in paragraph 3, the ship shall comply with the single-compartment standard as required by the first paragraph.
6. By way of derogation from the provisions of Article 2.2, doors in watertight bulkheads under the bulkhead deck shall not be permitted. If, in the opinion of the Minister, it is clear that a door in a watertight bulkhead is necessary for the operation of the ship, it may be waived in such a way as to be a door which is wholly above the surface of the greatest insinetion. Apply regulation. The provisions of Article 2.2 second, third and fourth members shall apply to such a door. In addition, such a door is equipped with a central closing device. There shall be an optical alert in the wheelhouse by means of which it is visible, whether such a door is opened or closed and locked.
(1) The proof of sufficient stability shall be furnished by the production of a calculation based on the results of a slope test and, where the inspector general so requires, of a turning point test.
2. In the case of ships with a length-of-water line not exceeding 25 m, sufficient stability, rather than by the arithmetic evidence referred to in paragraph 3, may be demonstrated by a stability test of the weight of half of the authorized number of vessels. persons. This test shall be carried out at the worst filling of the fuel and drinking water tanks.
The weight of half the number of persons permitted shall be moved to the ship's side by the part of the deck intended for passengers, and a density of 3 3/4 per m in the vessel. 2 , corresponding to 285 kg per m 2 , it is obtained.
In the case of this test, the heel is not more than 7 degrees after moving. The remaining freeboard and the remaining safety distance shall not be less than 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,20 m and 0,05 Latitude Waterline + 0,10 m, respectively.
(3) The arithmetical evidence of sufficient stability shall be deemed to be satisfied if it is found that the impact of the ship in the loading conditions referred to in Article 4.2 and the simultaneous influence of the vessel referred to in Article 4.3 is fulfilled. Moments are not more than 12 degrees.
4. The simultaneous impact of the transverse displacement of persons and of the load on vehicles shall not exceed 10 degrees.
(1) In the case of the stability calculation referred to in Article 4.1, third paragraph, the complete equipment, all crew members and the maximum number of passengers permitted shall be counted. The fuel and drinking water tanks are approved half-filled.
2. The weight of vehicles to be used for the calculation referred to in Article 4.1, third paragraph, and their load shall be determined by reducing the load capacity referred to in Article 5.3, second paragraph, by the weight of the complete equipment, all of the weights of the weight of the vehicle and their load shall be reduced by the weight of the vehicle and crew members, the maximum permitted number of passengers and the maximum content of fuel and drinking water tanks.
3. The weight of the vehicles and their cargo shall be apported over the ferry in proportion to the available deck space and in accordance with the nature of the vehicles to be applied to it.
4. In addition, where more than one cover is available for vehicles, a calculation shall be made with the lower deck empty and the other driving decks laden with the weight already determined by the third paragraph on vehicles.
5. For the initial state, no account needs to be taken of any trim and heel of the ship.
1. For ferries, the simultaneous influence of the corresponding moments is counted as a result of:
a. A transverse displacement of the maximum authorised number of persons, as referred to in Article 4.4;
b. A wind pressure as referred to in the fourth paragraph; and
c. A centrifugal force caused by agitator as referred to in the fifth paragraph.
2. In addition, the simultaneous influence of quenching moments is included as a result of:
a. A transverse displacement of the maximum permitted number of passengers, as referred to in Article 4.4;
b. A wind pressure, as referred to in the fourth paragraph; and
c. A load with a vehicle, as referred to in Article 4.5, second paragraph.
(3) The calculations referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 need not take into account the influence of any transversal or if any.
4. The cating moment Mw caused by the impact of the wind pressure, is calculated using the formula:
Mw = Pw. F. (hw + T/2)
In this formula, pw means specific wind pressure:
for zone 2: 20 kg/m 2 ;
for zone 3: 10 kg/m 2 ;
for zone 4: 10 kg/m 2 ;
F: the lateral surface area of the ship above the plane of the greatest breakdown in m 2 ;
hw: the distance from the centre of gravity of the lateral surface F above the plane of the greatest inzinking in m;
T: the average depth to the plane of the largest inzinking in m.
5. The ceding moment Mdr caused by the centrifugal force at rotting give, is calculated by the formula:
Mdr = 0,5. D/Lwl. (GK-T/2)
In this formula:
D: displacement of the loaded vessel into tonnes;
Lwl: the length, measured in the area of the greatest breakdown:
GK: the distance from the weight point point of the loaded ship to the top of the keel in m;
T: the average depth to the plane of the largest inzinking in m.
If the cargo of the loaded vessel is determined in the turning circle, the value thus obtained shall be counted as calculated. This test shall be carried out at half the speed of the ship, in the case of full load and at the lowest diameter of the turning circle as it is at the time of the loading.
1. In determining the moment of time resulting from a transverse movement of persons as referred to in Article 4.3 (1) (a) (a), the basis for calculating the location of the overall centre of gravity of the Passengers on the heart ship.
2. For the calculation of the moment, a movement of all passengers from a heart ship is assumed to that side of the ship, with the arm of the moment being greatest. It includes a density of 3,75 persons per metre. 2 The front surface of the headlamp. For the occupancy of seat benches, per passenger with a width of 0,50 m and a seating depth of 0,75 m is counted.
1. In the case of vehicles referred to in Article 4.2, the vehicle shall be divided into a uniform distribution between the driving decks.
2. The carcase shall be calculated for the worst worst condition, where the heaviest on the ferry shall be as far away as possible from the centre of the vessel. The other deck spaces shall be either empty or evenly charged as referred to in Article 4.2, second, third and fourth paragraphs.
3. The trim is calculated for the most unfavourable condition in which the heaviest vehicle on the ferry is as far from the centre as possible.
The other deck spaces shall be either empty or evenly charged as referred to in Article 4.2, second and third paragraphs.
4. For the height of the centre of gravity of vehicles and their load, above the driving deck shall be equal to 0,80 m in the case of passenger cars and by 2,00 m for lorries, buses and the like.
1. In the location of the ferry caused by the relevant moments referred to in Article 4.3, a residual freeboard referred to in the second paragraph, and a residual safety distance as referred to in paragraph 3, shall be present.
2. In the case of ferries whose patrolling gates or windows are sufficiently strong in the ship's skin and all openings in the vessel are secured against any undesired entry of water, the remaining freeboard shall be at least 0,20 m. For the tripled state referred to in Article 4.5, third paragraph, the remaining freeboard may be reduced to 0,10 m at the end of the ferry.
3. In the case of ships whose patrolling gates or windows can be opened in the ship's house or where other unsecured openings are present in the skin, the remaining safety distance to such openings shall be at least 0,10 m. In this case, moreover, the remaining rule is that the remaining freeboard must be at least 0,20 m.
1. The freeboard shall be at least equal to the sum of:
a. The breakdown, measured, shall be measured as a result of the impact of the heel according to the requirements of Articles 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3; and
b. The remaining freeboard provided for in Article 5.1.
The freeboard shall be at least 0,40 m.
2. The safety distance shall be at least equal to the sum of:
a. The breakdown, measured, shall be measured as a result of the impact of the heel according to the requirements of Articles 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3; and
b. the residual safety distance referred to in Article 5.1.
However, the safety distance to openings which are not watertight shall not be less than 0,60 m.
(1) The plane of the greatest breakdown shall be established in such a way as to ensure that both Articles 3.1 to 5.2 are complied with.
The Minister may, however, determine for a certain ferry or for a particular vessel, for safety reasons, a greater freeboard or a greater security distance.
2. The load capacity, corresponding to the largest breakdown referred to in paragraph 1, shall be determined by arithmetic based on the results of a loading test.
(1) The maximum number of passengers permitted shall be determined in such a way as to ensure that both Articles 3.1 to 5.2 are complied with.
2. In addition, the number of passengers is subject to the available deck level in accordance with the fourth to sixth members, except that the deck space intended for the carriage of vehicles with more than two wheels is not to be used for the purpose of transporting vehicles with more than two wheels. number of passengers.
3. Without prejudice to the transports of the first and second paragraphs, a ferry shall carry a ferry to a maximum of 1750.
(4) For the calculation of the maximum number of passengers permitted, the sum shall be taken from the free portions of the headway surfaces normally intended for passengers. It shall not include sleeping quarters and toilets, as well as those spaces which are permanent or temporary for the operation of the ship, even if they are accessible to passengers. In addition, the spaces under the main deck shall not be taken into account. In the main deck, rooms with large windows with upper deck windows may be taken into account.
5. to be deducted from the sum of the surfaces calculated according to the second paragraph:
a. The surfaces of corridors, staircases and other connecting roads;
b. The surfaces under stairs;
c. The surfaces that are permanently occupied by equipment and furniture; and
d. Surfaces under tugs, rescue boats, rescue rafts and the like, even when placed so high, that the passengers can stop underneath them.
(6) The maximum number of passengers permitted shall be calculated by multiplying the number of square metres of the clearance level determined according to the fourth and fifth paragraphs by the factor of 2,5. In ships with a length waterline of less than 25 m, it is permissible to set this factor to 2.8.
1. The decks accessible to passengers, land corridors and the driving decks shall be constructed in such a way as to ensure a uniform load of not less than 4000 N/m 2 can wear.
To be constructed solely for the transport of passenger cars with a height of at least 2,00 m of a height of at least 2000 N/m, with a pass height of not more than 2,00 m 2 .
2. The fixed and movable decks, the loading valves and the like shall also be calculated for the maximum permissible axle loads and wheel pressures.
(3) The permissible stresses in the construction shall be calculated in accordance with the rules of a designated investigation bureau, within the meaning of Article 14, first paragraph, of the Act.
4. Under the bulkhead deck there are no cover intended for vehicles.
5. The decks intended for vehicles shall be executed without a whan.
6. Without prejudice to the requirements concerning the safety distance, openings in the bulkhead deck, if fitted with a deck intended for vehicles, shall have a threshold of at least 30 cm in height.
7. Dekken intended for vehicles having more than two wheels shall be fitted with a surface layer such that at a static angle of the ferry of 15 ° vehicles, in particular lorries, buses and the like, are not Slipping.
8. Dekken, in particular the decks intended for vehicles, shall be equipped with sufficient means to enable rapid discharge of over-coming water, rainwater and fire-extinguishing water.
9. The decks intended for vehicles shall have at least an available width b in millimetres according to the following formulae:
a. With raised footpaths, for example, vanes or pavements, with a width of 0 to 450 mm:
b = r. n + 500
b is measured between the walls, various different walls or stern works,
b. In the case of elevated sidewalks, for example, vanes or pavements, of a width of 450 mm or more:
b = r. (n-2) + 2. s
b is measured between the standing edges of the footpaths, for example, vanes or sidewalks, except that b is only a single scuplane between the opstanding edges s mm.
In these formulae:
n = the number of adjustment strips;
r = width of the adjustment strip for passenger cars 2150 mm, for lorries, buses and the like 3050 mm;
s = width of the adjustment strip for passenger cars 1 950 mm, for lorries, buses and the like 2 850 mm.
The sizes r and s apply to a height from the 2000 mm driving deck for passenger cars and 3000 mm for lorries, buses and other buses.
b. The adjustment strips on the decks intended for vehicles shall be clearly marked. Where a deck has more than two strips of adjustment, the outline stripes of the outer bands shall be at a distance of not less than 2400 mm for passenger cars and 3300 mm for lorries, buses and the like of a wall, bulkhead or fencing. However, in the presence of an increased footpath, for example pavement or pavement, the distance from the marker line to the standing edge should be at least 1950 and 2850 mm respectively. The width of the adjustment strips is measured at the heart of the marker stripes. Provided that the marker stripes are clearly distinguished, different layouts for passenger cars and trucks, buses, etc. are possible.
c. A restraining prohibition shall apply to places where existing structures cannot be satisfied by the width of the restraining strips referred to in (a) and (b). This shall be marked by markings on deck. A derogation from this requirement may be granted if it is demonstrated that the vehicles can be safely abandoned.
10. The maximum permissible axle load and wheel pressure shall be clearly visible in a suitable place except where the deck is constructed for all vehicles permitted under the Road Traffic Regulation.
1. In the case of railings, only vertical pillars with a distance of not more than 100 mm shall be allowed.
2. In the ship ' s house no windows and gates can be used under the free-board deck which can be opened.
1. Ferries shall be provided with common rescue equipment as referred to in Article 15.09 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC, for all persons on board. However, the carrying capacity in salt water shall be at least 750 N per authorised person.
2. The rescue equipment referred to in paragraph 1 shall in addition comply with the following requirements:
a. They provide sufficient space for the seating of the maximum permitted number of persons on board;
b. They are of such form that persons present in the water may be on board;
c. They are equipped with lines connected to the ferry in order to prevent untimely drift; and
d. They shall be provided with means to draw attention to them, such as with the word-word-word signalling.
3. Ferries are provided to both sides of emergency landing sites which can be safely reached at any time from the residence places for the passengers.
Access to emergency disembarkation spaces shall not be provided by spaces intended for the purpose of vehicle preparation.
(4) Where the vertical distance between the deck of the emergency landing places and the plane of the greatest breakdown is greater than 2,00 m, emergency disembarkation facilities shall be provided at the emergency disembarkation sites.
5. By ship side, emergency disembarkation products as referred to in paragraph 4 shall be provided according to the following table, depending on the largest number of passengers using it in the event of an emergency.
This number shall be determined in accordance with Article 6.1.
Largest number of passengers
Number of decreation ladders
Number of slides
| 0 to 750 |
1 |
- |
| 751 to 1000 |
2 |
- |
| 1001 to 1375 |
2 |
1 |
| 1376 to 1750 |
2 |
2 |
6. Disembarkation ladders are of such length that they reach on the waterline in the most unfavourable position of the ship in undamaged condition or in flat condition.
Disembarkation ladders have been carried out as rope ladders. It consists of a ladder of at least four vertical ropes at a distance of not less than 60 cm and not more than 80 cm. The spacing of the horizontal steps taken shall not exceed 30 cm.
Disembarkation nets with corresponding dimensions of other constructions may be permitted.
7. Unmoving slides can be of fixed or self-unfolding execution. The width of each slide shall be not less than 60 cm and not more than 80 cm.
The length and surface roughness of the slides shall be chosen so as to ensure sufficient but not too high glide speed.
8. The emergency disembarkation equipment and its associated establishments must be of a construction or approved type approved by the Minister.
Ferries shall be equipped with portable flight masks that have a duration of operation of at least 15 minutes. The number shall be at least four plus two for each deck intended for vehicles on more than two wheels. The flight masks shall be placed in a suitable place. They are provided with clear instructions for use.
1. On ferries are clearly and clearly legible instructions for passengers in the event of calamities.
The content and location of these instructions shall be determined in consultation with the Minister.
2. On ferries, there are clearly visible signs, on which instructions for the drivers of vehicles have been clearly legible with regard to the setting-off of the engine and the putting on the brakes of the vehicle.
3. By means of markings and marking signs it is indicated that the use of exits, walkways and flight paths should not be obstructed by baggage, cycling and the like.
1. Ferries fitted to the front and rear ship with fully identical means of propulsion and steering shall be equipped with at least one anchor at each end of the vessel.
2. In a case referred to in paragraph 1, the total weight of the anchors shall be at least P for each vessel in respect of which the value P is determined in accordance with Article 10.01, second paragraph, of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
3. each anchor is equipped with an anchor chain, tros or cable, whose length and breaking strength are determined according to the provisions for bow necklaces, bunches and cables of article 10.01, 10th, eleventh and fourteenth member, of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
In this case, the formula for the value P ' takes the specific theoretical weight of the anchor concerned.
In addition to the equipment required by the Directive, ferries shall have on board the following equipment:
a. A well-functioning radar installation and rate-of-turn indicator;
b. A clinometer in each wheelhouse.
1. Ferries which are designed or equipped for the transport of more than 300 passengers shall be equipped with at least two completely separate machinery for propulsion.
2. The power of the propulsion machinery installed in each of the machinery spaces referred to in the first paragraph shall be such that it can achieve a ship speed equal to 0,6 times the speed of the service.
(3) The propulsion systems of the separate machinery spaces referred to in paragraph 1 shall be fully independent of each other.
Ferries provided for a certificate of investigation between 1 July 2009 and 1 January 2011 shall apply:
a. Annex 3.7 Entry into the Inland Treat system as it was by 31 December 2010;
b. This Annex, except:
1 °. Chapters 2 to 6;
2 °. Articles 8.4 and 9.1; and
3 ° Article 1.2 in respect of Articles 15.01, 15.05 first, third and fourth paragraphs 15.06, 15.08, 15.09 first paragraph, first paragraph, second to eleventh paragraphs, and 15.10 to 15.15 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
(1) The conceptual provisions of Article 1.01 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC shall be applicable mutatis mutandis.
2. In addition, the following definitions shall apply:
Petrol: the substance identified in Part 3, Tables A and C of Annex 1 to the VBG, as PETROL or MOTOR fuel, Class 3, UN 1203;
Upper cargo area: Deck space for hazardous materials, the area formed by a radius of 1,00 m around the arrangement of pumps for release of petrol and the area formed by the upper deck area with a radius of radius of 1,00 m around the ventilation openings of the trunk and with a radius of 2,00 m around the ventilation openings of the cargo tanks;
bunkering: they deliver to ships of gas oil, diesel or gasoline as a fuel for the purposes of those ships;
BRL (KIWA Assessment Directive): a document approved by the College of Experts on Soil Protective Devices containing requirements used by the certification body as the basis for the issue and maintenance of certificates;
CPR 9 -1: Directive on underground storage in steel tanks and engine fuel delivery plants issued by the Commission for the Prevention of Disaster by Hazardous Substances;
Gas oil or diesel oil: the substance identified in Part 3, Tables A and C of Annex 1 to the VBG, as DIESEL or GASOIL or HEATING OIL, LIGHT, Class 3, UN 1202;
IEC Publication 245: the publication 'Rubber insulated cables or rated voltages up to and including 450/750 Volts'; part 1: 'General requirements', part 2: 'Test methods' and part 4: 'Cords and flexible cables', issued by the International Electrotechnical Commission;
KIWA: KIWA N.V., established in Rijswijk;
Loading and unloading pipes: all pipes and associated pumps, filters and lock-up devices in which liquid or gaseous charge may be located;
Cargo tank: a tank fixed with the bunker station, intended or used for the storage of gas oil, diesel or petrol;
L × B × H: the product of the main measurements of the bunker station in m 3 according to the measuring letter in which:
L = the largest length of the ship's hull in m,
B = the largest width of the ship's hull in m;
H is the smallest vertical distance between the underside of the keel and the lowest point of the deck in the side of the bunker station (cavity) in the loading zone in m;
unloading: Gas oil, diesel or petrol pumps from the loading tanks;
Underdeck cargo area: the whole of the space, situated between two vertical planes perpendicular to the longitudinal plane of the bunker station, comprising the cargo tanks, the cargo tank space, the trunk dams, the pump chamber, the side tanks and the double bottoms, where these surfaces are As a rule, coincide with the main luggage bulkheads or with the bulkheads crossing the cargo tank space, on the understanding that the premises situated on the premises are not included in the loading area;
3. In this Annex, the following definitions shall apply to the following definitions in Part 1, 1.2.1 of Annex 1 to the VBG:
a. A limited explosion-safe electrical device;
b. approved safe electrical equipment;
c. Explotion group;
d. Anti-inflammatory species:
1 °. EEx. (d): explosion-safe housing;
2 °. EEx. (ia): Intrinsically Safe Circuit;
3 °. EEx. (p): Overpressure housing;
e. temperature class;
f. SOLAS;
g. Service space;
h. trunk dam;
Cargo cargo area;
Independent cargo tank;
k. pump chamber;
l. dwelling;
m. Unprotected light.
Without prejudice to the compliance of bunker stations in this Annex, Chapters 3, 4, 8 with the exception of Articles 8.03 and 8.10, first and second paragraphs, 9, other than articles 9.02 and 9.17, 10 except for articles 10.01, 10.02 and 10.03a to 10.04, 11 and 12 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
(1) The hull and the cargo tanks shall be constructed of shipbuilding steel or other at least equivalent metal. The equivalence refers to the mechanical properties as well as to the same resistance to temperature or fire inaction. The Minister may authorise other equivalent materials for the material of the ship's hull and of the cargo tanks.
2. Independent cargo tanks are made of shipbuilding steel or a material with equivalent mechanical properties and a similar resistance to the inaction of temperature and fire.
3. Parts of the bunker station which may come into contact with the load, including parts of the device and equipment, shall be of material which:
a. cannot be affected by the load;
b. cannot cause any decomposition of the load; and
c. No harmful or dangerous compounds can be connected to the load.
(4) The use of wood or aluminium alloys in the loading zone shall be authorised only:
a. for loose equipment;
b. For the clogging of tanks independent of the ship's hull;
c. for the clogging of devices and equipment;
d. for machinery parts;
e. for electrical equipment components; and
f. For the parts of the load and unloading equipment.
5. The use of rubber in the loading zone shall be authorised only for:
a. coating of loading tanks and loading and unloading pipes;
b. Dipping;
c. Electric ducts;
d. Loading and unloading hoses; or
e. insulation of loading tanks and loading and unloading pipes.
6. The use of plastics in the loading zone is permitted for the purposes, referred to in the fourth and fifth members.
7. The minister may allow the use in the loading zone of plastics, rubber, wood or aluminium alloys for other purposes. The authorisation shall be entered in the certificate, specifying the type of substance and the purpose for which it is to be used.
8. In dwellings and in other rooms, solid materials, with the exception of materials used for furniture, are difficult to flammable and develop in the event of a fire, no dangerous quantity of smoke or toxic gas.
9. The paint used in the loading area does not cause any sparks in case of impact load or similar load.
The cargo tanks are built for or adapted to the storage and supply of gas oil, diesel or gasoline.
(1) The contents of a loading tank shall not exceed the number of cubic metres determined by the following table:
L × B × H in m 3
Maximum permissible contents of the loading tank in m 3
| up to 600 |
L × B × H × 0,3 |
| 600-3750 |
180 + (L × B × H-600) × 0, 0635 |
| more than 3750 |
380 |
2. Independent cargo tanks shall be protected against drifting.
3. A pump pump has not more than 0.10 m 3 content.
4. The maximum permitted amount of petrol per bunker station is 15 m 3 .
1. Ladin tanks, trunk baffles, and cargo tank spaces adjacent bulkheads are waterproof.
2. Loading tanks shall be separated from dwellings, machinery spaces and service spaces outside the loading area or, if these are missing, from the ship's signalling, by means of trunks separated by means of a minimum width of 0,60 m. If cargo tanks are put up in a cargo tank space, they shall be removed at least 0,60 m from the ship's signal.
3. If the cargo tanks are put up in a loading tank space, they shall be removed at least 0,50 m from the final bulkheads of the cargo tank space and, instead of a boot dam, may have a final shot provided with a brandification A-60 as referred to in Reg. II-2/3 of SOLAS, shall be fitted.
(4) A side tank with a minimum width of 0,60 m shall be installed on the side of the vessels to be bunted over the entire length of the cargo tanks. Where cargo tanks are put up in a cargo tank space, they shall be removed at least 0,60 m from the side of the vessels to be placed on the vessels to be placed on the board.
5. Between housing premises and other premises, a brandisolation A-60 as referred to in Regulation II-2/3 of SOLAS shall be affixed. The tank top can be inspected.
1. Loading tank openings are located in the upper deck of the cargo area.
2. Loading tank openings, the diameter of which has an area of more than 0,10 m 2 shall be at least 0,50 m above the deck. If these orifices are less than 0,50 m above deck, the loading tank shall be equipped with level measurement combined with an over-fill protection device.
3. any cargo container or group of cargo containers connected to each other by means of a gas-assembly line shall be provided with safety devices to prevent the impermissible overpressure and underpressure constructed in such a way that it is constructed intrusion of water into the loading tanks shall be prevented. The cargo tanks for the purpose of gas oil and petrol for petrol are not connected.
4. From the safety directions mentioned in the third paragraph of the cargo tanks for the storage of petrol, the pressure relief valve is equipped with a flame-bearing lattice and the pressure relief valve is as a flame-bearing fast-release valve. The underpressure valve is set to 3 kPa under pressure and the fast-release valve on 4 kPa overpressure.
5. Ladin tanks located under house, shop, office or other quarters are connected by means of a gas collector.
6. The opening of the safety devices of loading tanks intended for the storage of gas oil referred to in paragraph 3 shall be at least 2,00 m above the deck and shall be at least 3,00 m from the openings of dwellings and other stays.
7. The opening of the pressure relief valve of loading tanks intended for the storage of petrol specified in paragraph 3 shall be at least 5,00 metres above deck and shall be at least 3,00 m from the openings of dwellings and other quarters.
8. The cargo tanks, which are intended for the storage of petrol, shall be equipped with a Damage ourdirection in order to return the gases to the tanker, supplying the petrol or supplying the fuel vessel, which supplies the petrol, during the filling of the cargo tanks. In the case of loading from a tank vehicle, the system is designed to prevent the formation of pressure emitting as much as possible. The vapour source system is equipped with a spring gate valve which keeps the system closed, even if the lid is not fitted.
9. The contact point of the Damage ourdirection is such that the fitting of the filler hose is excluded from the Damage ourdirection.
1. Load and release assemblies shall be integrated.
2. Load and release pipes are independent of other pipes.
3. Load and release pipes are sufficiently pliable, and have sufficient density and resistance to the test pressure.
4. Metal couplings of the pliable hoses to the ships to be bunted are grounded in such a way that electrostatic charging is prevented.
5. The loading and unloading pipes shall be so arranged that the liquid shall be returned to the loading tanks or disposed of in such piping or disposed of in as safe a manner as possible.
6. Under the charge pumps and the connections used for loading or unloading, devices shall be provided to ensure that any leakage fluid is placed on the catch.
7. Laad and release lines clearly distinguish themselves from other pipes.
8. Mounts of loading and unloading pipes shall be fitted with a coupling that complies with European standard EN 12 827.
9. The parts of the loading and unloading pipes are electrically conductive to the ship's hull.
10. The open or closed position of a lockup of a loading and unloading unit shall be clearly marked and clearly marked.
11. The installation for delivery of petrol complies with CPR 9-1, Chapter 6.
12. Pumps for the issue of gas oil are either on deck or in a service space intended for that purpose.
13. Pumps and pipes for the issue of petrol are either located on deck or in a pump room. If the pump is on deck, the distance to the openings of dwellings and other quarters shall be at least 6,00 m. The space on deck and the pump room shall be counted to the loading area.
1. Load and release pipes shall be fitted at the entrance and at the outlet of the pump for pressure measurement devices.
2. The pointing scales of the manometers have a diameter of at least 0.14 m.
(3) The pressure in the loading and unloading pipes shall be legible from the point of operation of the pumps connected to such pipes.
4. The maximum permitted over and under pressure is indicated by means of a red stripe.
1. A boot dam occupies the entire surface of the final bulkheads of the cargo tanks.
2. The bulkhead of the cargo area from the trunk of the trunk is made from the shipowner to the shipowner and from the ground floor to the deck in a single particle plane.
3. The boot dam, the middle part of a boot dam or any other space within the lower cargo area may be arranged as a service space, if:
a. The service area adjacent bulkheads shall be placed vertically to the bottom;
b. The service space is accessible only from deck; and
c. The service compartment, with the exception of the access and ventilation openings, is watertight.
4. Sacrificial dams between machine rooms or service spaces and cargo tanks can be filled and gilded with water by means of a pump. Filling can take place within 30 minutes.
(5) The fourth paragraph shall not apply if the bulkhead between the engine room or the service compartment and the boot dam is equipped with a brandification A-60 as referred to in Regulation II-2/3 of SOLAS.
6. Ksacrificial dams are not connected via a fixed fixed line with another pipe of the bunker station outside the loading zone.
1. Loading tanks, trunk baffles, end bulkheads of the cargo and cargo compartments shall have no openings or translinings other than those specified in this Article under deck.
2. In the bulkheads between two cargo refuelling spaces, pierliners are permitted to be fitted.
(3) In the bulkhead between engine room and trunk or service compartment in the cargo area, it shall be permitted to bear the gas-tight penetrations permitted by an approved investigation bureau.
4. If the bunker station is equipped with a pump chamber under deck, the bulkhead between loading tanks may be interlined with one another, if the load line in the pump chamber is directly fitted to the bulkhead. This valve can be operated from the deck.
5. Power-drive axles of the lens and ballast pumps in the loading zone may be operated by the bulkhead between the service compartment and the engine room, if:
(a) the service space satisfies the definition in Article 10, third paragraph;
b. The passage of the axis through the bulkhead is gas-tight;
(c) the passage through an approved investigation desk is permitted; and
d. The necessary operating instructions are indicated on a board.
6. Electrical cables, hydraulic lines and piping for measuring, rule and alarm devices may be used by the bulkhead between engine room and service space in the loading zone, if the gas-liners are gastight and approved by an approved body. The investigation desk is permitted.
7. In the case of piping between engine room and service space, pipelines may be conducted in the case of piping between machinery in the engine room and of the service compartment, which do not have openings in the service compartment and shall be at the bulkhead have been fitted in the engine room with a stop valve.
(8) From the engine room, piping may be carried out by the service space in the cargo area or by the trunk, if they have been carried out in the service space or in the boot in didiscus and in the service space or in the service compartment. Boot dam does not have any flensing connections or openings.
1. Access openings to trunk dams, side tanks, double bottoms, cargo tanks, cargo tank spaces and other accessible spaces in the cargo area have such dimensions, that a person wearing a breathing apparatus is unobstructed in and out of space. Can come.
2. The minimum size of an access opening is 0.36 m 2 and the smallest side 0.50 m.
3. Ladingtanks may be fitted with round openings with a minimum diameter of 0,70 m. In the case of cargo tanks with a capacity of less than 10 m 3 the diameter may be reduced to 0,60 m.
4. Access openings shall be such that those persons who are injured or out of knowledge can be removed from the bottom of the space without any particular difficulty.
(5) Service spaces on deck in the loading zone shall be arranged so as to be accessible and to ensure safe operation by persons carrying personal safety equipment in the cargo area thereof. Injured or out-of-knowledge persons may be removed from the service room without any particular difficulties.
1. Exhaust Gas Outlet exit holes are at least 2,00 m away from the loading area.
2. exhaust piping from engines shall be installed in such a way that the exhaust gases are removed from the bunker station.
3. exhaust piping shall not be installed in the loading zone.
(4) Exhaust Ducts are provided with a device to prevent the appearance of sparks.
(1) If the bunker station is equipped with cargo spaces, the double bottom of such spaces may be set as fuel tank, if the double bottom is at least 0,60 m high.
2. Fuel pipes and openings of fuel tanks are not located in cargo refuelling areas.
3. Combustion pipes of fuel tanks have been fed to 0.50 m above the open deck.
4. The openings of the overflow piping shall be fitted with protection formed by means of a lattice or a perforated plate.
1. Double bottoms in use as fuel tank are not connected to the lens system.
2. If the ballast pump is in the loading zone, the stand-pipe and the outboard connector for ballast water shall also be located in the loading area.
(3) A pump room under deck may be used in the cargo area to be independent in case of an emergency using any of the other installations. This lens device is prepared outside the pump room.
1. Internal combustion engines have been installed outside the loading area.
2. Machinekrooms are accessible from the deck.
1. Fan louses of machinery spaces and inlet openings of engines shall be at least 2,00 m away from the loading area, if the engines do not exhaust the air directly from the engine room.
2. Voncforming in the loading zone is ruled out.
3. The surface temperatures of external parts and air and exhaust gas ducts of engines used during loading and unloading shall not be higher than those of temperature class T3.
4. The ventilation of the closed engine room is such that at an outdoor temperature of 20 ° C the average temperature of the engine room is not higher than 40 ° C.
Electrically conductive connections between the bunker station and shore and the bunker station and the ship to be bunched are such that they do not form an ignition source.
1. Sacrificial dams, side tanks, double bottoms, cargo tanks, cargo tank spaces and other accessible spaces in the cargo area shall be arranged so as to be able to be fully cleaned and inspected.
2. Segregated spaces intended for ballast, spaces may be ventilated in the loading zone.
3. Wages and service spaces may be ventilated. On the side where the ships are mowing down, there are no openings or access to the dwellings or service spaces.
4. From spaces in the loading zone, it can be determined from the outside whether they are gas-free.
1. Each cargo container shall bear:
a. A filling mark with the fillingrate of 97%;
b. A level alert direction that enters into force at the latest by a content of 90%.; and
(c) if required under Article 7 (2), an over-fill security which enters into force at the latest by a content of 97.5% or, if loaded from a tanker, a security with a content of 97,5%, provided that: The load line contents and/or the load hose can still be included in the loading tank to be loaded, automatically and completely shut down the feed to the cargo container.
2. The filling rate is determined in percentage terms with an error of up to 0.5 percentage point.
3. The filling degree shall be determined in relation to the total contents of the loading tank including the expansionary.
4. The fillingrate is determined for a temperature of the substance of 15 ° C.
5. The level alert direction and the over-fill protection shall switch on board an optical and acoustic alarm.
6. The optical alarm shall be detectable from any location where the loading tank valves are operated.
7. If the operation of the ladle tank valves is located in a control area, the optical and acoustic alarm of the level alert direction shall be observable both in the control room and on deck.
8. A proper overview of the position of connection to the loading and unloading pipes is provided from the control room.
9. The level alert direction referred to in paragraph 1 (b) shall not be necessary if the content of the cargo tank is less than 10 m 3 shall be.
10. The security, referred to in the first paragraph, part c, operates independently of the tank vehicle and is of a type approved by KIWA and complies with BRL-K 636.
1. The bunker station has a quick-lock device which can be suspended by means of suspension. This device shall be closed by the binary signal of the part of the over-filling security into the bunker of the ship to be bunted by means of an operating device. The quick-lock device can be closed independently of the binary signal.
2. The control device converts the binary signal into a signal through which the quick-lock device is closed.
3. Flow circles for the control of the quick-closing devices are either carried out in the resting-current principle or are secured by means of other appropriate errors for the verification of errors. Power circuits that cannot be switched according to the resting flow principle are easy to control with respect to their smooth operation.
(4) The binary signal can be supplied to the steering system via intrinsically safe circuit with wall contact boxes of a coupling device specified in IEC Publication 309 for DC 40 to 50 V, colour white, conduction cam 10 hours is transferred.
5. The quick-lock device shall set an optical and acoustic alarm on board.
1. On board, there are safety goggles, a pair of safety gloves, protective clothing and a pair of safety boots for each crew member. These provide adequate protection against harmful effects of gas oil, diesel or gasoline.
2. If empty cargo tanks or cargo containers are to be entered where there is a lack of oxygen, there shall be two outdoor independent oxygen devices and two safety lines on board.
3. The bunker station is equipped with a shower and an eye and facial bath on a direct from the charge area accessible place.
The bunker station is provided with clear signs with the access ban and smoking ban. The signs are clearly visible on both sides of the bunker station both during the day and during the night. If necessary, indicate on board where and under which circumstances a prohibition shall not be in force.
Electrical devices are in unimpaired condition.
1. An automatic earth fault control device with an optical and acoustic alarm has been incorporated in each isolated distribution system. The failure of these devices shall be reported on the normally intended locations.
2. Installation sections of isolated localised areas and outside the loading zone and the earth fault control device referred to in paragraph 1 shall not be electrically conductive connected to the ship's hull.
1. In the cargo area there are no electrical appliances which do not comply with the requirements for explosion group IIA and temperature class T3.
2. In cargo tanks and loading and unloading pipes, no electrical devices, with the exception of intrinsically safe measuring, rule and alarm devices, are not.
3. In the case of trunk, cargo refuelling areas and, if there are any side tanks and double bottoms, no electrical devices, except:
a. Measurement, rule and alarm devices in approved safe execution;
b. Lights in the ignition type of EEx (d) or EEx (p).
4. In the service spaces on deck in the cargo area, no electrical equipment with the exception of:
a. Measurement, rule and alarm devices in approved safe execution;
b. Lights in the ignition type of EEx (d) or EEx (p);
c. Engines in approved safe execution for the plant necessary for the holding.
5. Non-intrinsically safe control equipment of installations as specified in the second, third and fourth members shall be located outside the loading zone.
6. The electrical devices on deck are at least limited explosion safely.
7. Accumulators are located outside the loading area.
8. Electrical equipment outside the loading area, which has not been carried out at least limited in explosion, may be switched off from a central position on board.
9. Non-restricted exploding generators that are continuously powered by a machine are fitted with a switch which disables the power of the generator. A plate with the operating controls has been applied to the switch.
10. The electrical supply of electrical supply of safety and control devices shall be reported directly, automatically, optically and acoustically to the intended places normally intended.
(1) The metal parts of electrical equipment, non-voltage electrical appliances, metal coats and mantels in the loading area, which are not prescient to normal operation, are grounded or connected by the mode of construction with the ship's hull.
2. Ladingtanks are grounded.
1. Kabels in the loading zone are equipped with a metal-fall direction.
2. Kabels and wall contact boxes in the loading zone and on deck are protected from mechanical damage.
3. Insulated cables for the purpose of intrinsically safe circuits and cables for the connection of signalling, navigation and treadboard lighting are not loose cables in the cargo area.
4. Kabels for intrinsically safe flow circles are only part of intrinsically safe circuits.
5. Kabels for intrinsically safe circuits are completely separated from cables for non-intrinsically safe circuits.
1. The cables for the connection of signalling, navigation and treadboard lighting shall be equipped with the type H 07 RN-F, as defined in IEC Publication 245-66, or of at least equivalent personnel lines. The area of the minimum diameter of the conductive wires is 1,5 mm. 2 .
2. The cables shall be placed as short as possible and in such a way as to avoid any danger of unintended damage.
3. Wandcontact boxes for the connection of signalling and navigation lights shall be fixed in the immediate vicinity of the mast to which the lighting is attached.
4. Wandcontact boxes for the connection of walk-through lighting are located in the immediate vicinity of the gangway to be lighted.
5. The wall contact boxes are not under tension in the light of switched lighting.
6. The plugs and pulling out of the plugs shall not be possible for under-tension wall contact boxes.
Portable light bulbs in use in the cargo area and on deck are equipped with its own power source and are explosively executed.
1. On board adequate lighting shall be provided to safely load at night or in case of poor visibility.
2. Lighting from the deck shall be done by well-confirmed electrical lamps so placed, that they cannot be damaged.
1. Lighting on board is electric.
2. Heat, cooking and refrigeration appliances are electric.
3. By way of derogation from the second paragraph, for heaters and boilers that are prepared in the engine room or in a specially suitable space, liquid fuels with a flash point above 55 ° C may be used.
4. Kook and refrigeration appliances are located exclusively in dwellings and storehouses.
5. Openings of chimneys are located at least 2,00 m outside the loading zone.
6. Shearstones shall be constructed in such a way as to prevent the appearance of sparks and the intakes of water.
(1) In addition to the first paragraph of Article 10.03 of Annex II to this Regulation, Directive 2006 /87/EC The required portable extinguishers shall still be at least two additional portable extinguishers in the cargo area. Article 10.03, second paragraph, of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC the additional extinguishers shall apply.
2. The bunker station is equipped with a fixed built-in fire extinguishing system.
(3) The fixed built-in fire-extinguishing system, referred to in paragraph 2, shall comply with the following characteristics, if water is used as extinguishing medium:
a. The installation is powered by two independent fire-bbing or ballast pumps or by a permanent shore-side connection;
b. In the case of supply by on-board pumps, one of these pumps is always operational and the pumps have not been established in the same room;
c. At least three fire-hose connectors on deck;
d. There are three sufficiently long and on the fire hose connectors appropriate fire hoses, equipped with a nozzle;
e. The spray piece shall have a diameter of not less than 12 mm;
f. At least two water jets from the same fire-hose connector cannot reach any place of the deck in the loading zone at the same time;
g. the capacity of the installation shall be at least sufficient to allow for the simultaneous use of two nozzles from each location on board the extinguishing water to reach an oblong distance equal to the ship's width; and
h. A spring-loaded return valve ensures that gases cannot pass through the fire-extinguishing system into dwellings or service spaces outside the loading zone.
1. All service spaces shall be equipped with an efficient fire-melting plant, which shall automatically report the presence of a fire and the location of a fire.
2. The fire melting plant is in operation at all times.
3. The fire melting plant may be fitted with additional manual fire detectors, however, which do not match the prescribed automatic fire detectors.
4. The operation of the fire melting plant is based on the resting power principle. This shall cause an optical and acoustic alarm signal on each control panel to be disturbed.
5. The presence of fire shall be centrally and acoustically reported at the centre of the normal position.
6. The fire melting plant has been carried out in one of the following ways:
a. The fire detectors are remotely identified individually; or
b. The fire detectors are grouped in sections.
7. If the remote fire detectors have been individually identified, also called the addressable system, the control panel contains clear information about the location of each detected space.
8. If the fire detectors are grouped in sections, also called the non-addressable system, shall apply:
a. The control panel shall contain clear information about the location of each reported section;
b. A section shall not cover more than one deck. In the case where a closed stairwell extends over more decks, the stairwell may be executed as a single section;
c. For each of the following spaces, they shall not belong to other spaces to one section:
1 °. a space where an internal combustion engine is established;
2 °. a pumping chamber;
3 °. an enclosed stairwell if the stairwell is connected to more than two decks;
4. a storage of dangerous substances;
5 °. a shop.
The following documents shall be on board:
a. A valid certificate;
b. written instructions relating to the storage of gas oil or diesel oil;
c. An updated copy of Appendix 1 of the VBG;
d. An updated copy of Annex II of Directive 2006 /87/EC and this Annex;
e. a test book;
f. the valid evidence of testing of the fire extinguishers, the hoses, the loading and unloading hoses, the electrical devices and, if required, of the special equipment;
g. a drawing showing the boundaries of the loading area and the electrical equipment installed in this zone;
h. A list of electrical devices installed in the cargo area;
i. A list or schedule of electrical appliances that are present outside the loading area and which are eliminated in the event of a disaster;
j. instructions in the Netherlands in the language of the appliances and installations where use of special safety measures is required; and
k. The documents relating to the over-fill security and the installation for the delivery of petrol, if any.
1. The instructions referred to in Article 35 (b) shall act in the case of accidents and incidents. They shall be suspended at a place accessible to all staff members.
2. The staff shall be informed of the place where the instructions are hung, the content and the manner in which they are to be implemented.
3. The instructions are set in the Dutch language.
(4) The instructions shall give succincts to:
a. The nature of the risk involved in the storage of gas oil, diesel or petrol and the necessary safety measures resulting therefrom;
(b) the measures to be taken and the aid to be granted, if persons contact with gas oil, diesel or petrol;
c. the measures to be taken on fire and the means or groups of resources that may be used in the fight against fire; and
d. Measures to be taken in the event of rupture or other damage to the tanks or to the release of stored gas oil, diesel or petrol, in particular, if these substances have been dispersed.
The proof of testing of fire extinguishers referred to in Article 35 (f) shall also be affixed to the apparatus.
1. the list referred to in Article 35 (h) shall indicate the location of the arrangement, the method of protection, the anti-inflammatory species, the approval authority and the approval number of the electrical equipment installed in the loading area. devices.
(2) The documents referred to in Article 35 (f), (g), (h) and (i) shall bear a stamp of approval of the Minister.
(3) Where it is conducive to clarity, the documents referred to in Article 35 (f), (g), (h) and (i) of Article 35 may be combined in a single document with particulars of the documents provided for in Article 35.
(1) The tests or tests prescribed in this chapter shall be carried out by persons appointed by the Minister for that purpose.
(2) The result of the inspection or testing shall be signed in the trials book provided for in Article 35 (e) by the person who carried out the inspection or testing, stating the date on which such inspection or testing was carried out. the trial has taken place or has ended.
(3) If it is apparent from an inspection or testing that the approved or tried and tested fails to comply with the requirements laid down, the person who carried out the inspection or test shall immediately inform the Minister.
The following shall be approved by an approved installer in the third year of validity of the certificate:
a. The insulation resistance of the electrical devices;
b. The grounding of the electrical devices; and
c. Explosion-protected electrical devices.
(1) The fire extinguishers provided for in Article 33, first paragraph, and the hoses referred to in Article 33, third paragraph, shall be inspected once every two years by an approved installer.
2. Loading and unloading hoses shall be inspected once a year.
(3) The special equipment referred to in Article 22 shall be assessed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer of the equipment. Article 39, first paragraph, shall not apply.
1. Loading tanks, trunk and loading and unloading pipes shall be tested for entry first and then at least once every 11 years at least.
2. The test pressure for the trunk and open loading tanks shall be at least 10 kPa overpressure.
(3) The test pressure of the loading and unloading pipes shall be at least 1000 kPa of overpressure.
(4) The pressure testing shall be carried out in accordance with rules issued by the Minister or an approved investigating agency to that effect.
The measuring equipment shall be tested by the user for each use in accordance with the instructions for use. Article 39 shall not apply.
The Minister may waive the certificate for the renewal of the certificate as referred to in Article 4 (2). Article 3.14, second paragraph , if the condition of the hull reasonably allows control from within.
(1) Where no quick-lock device as referred to in Article 21 is present at the bunker station or the ship to be bunted, a bunker checklist shall be completed in full and in duplicate before the bunting begins.
2. The bunker checklist shall contain the following information:
a. The name of the bunkering station;
b. The name and the unique European ship identification number of the ship to be bungled;
c. the name of the skipper or the plenipotentiary of the ship to be bunted;
d. the place where and the date on which the bunkering takes place;
e. the amount of gas oil, diesel or gasoline to be bungled;
f. The pump speed in litres per minute; and
g. the amount of lubricating oil to be overpumped.
3. The skipper of the ship to be bunted and the person responsible for the bunkering sign the bunker checklist after filling in.
4. The first, second and third paragraphs shall not apply if the bunkering station is up to 30 m in total 3 gas oil, diesel or gasoline may contain.
Ships to be bunked and unloaded shall be so shreds that the electrical cables and flexible pipes do not come under tensile or bend voltage. In case of danger, it can be quickly detated.
1. During bunkering, no fire or unprotected light is present on board.
2. Non-explosive explosively exported electrical devices outside the loading zone shall be eliminated in the event of a disaster.
3. Ships on which no bunker watch is designated or with which communication is not adequately insured shall not be booted.
4. During bunkering, bunkering is freely movable in all directions and has sufficient leeway.
5. In case of danger, bunkering is stopped immediately.
6. Liquid-retarded fluid, excluding those in vollsklachsystems, shall be disposed of safely.
1. During loading, no fire or unprotected light is present on board of the bunker station.
2. Non-explosive explosively exported electrical devices outside the loading zone shall be eliminated in the event of a disaster.
3. In case of danger, loading is stopped immediately.
4. Liquid-retarded fluid, with the exception of those in vollslauche systems, is disposed of safely.
5. During the filling of a cargo tank with gasoline from a tanker truck, the tanker truck is in the open air and the opening of the cargo tank is closed. During the power-on and off-coupling of the loosening hose and the Damage ourhose, the engine of the tanker is not in operation. Measures have been taken to carry out any electrostatic electricity that has arisen. To this end, a earth cable with a minimum core surface area of 25 mm 2 applied between the tank top and the loading tank to be filled.
6. filling of a cargo tank with gasoline from a tanker truck is only done by free fall.
7. Immediately after loading and unmount the last load, the load connector is closed.
1. During the discharge of the gas, no fire or unprotected light shall be present on board the bunker station.
2. Non-explosion-safe electrical devices have been switched off during the off-gas process.
Gas oil, diesel oil or petrol is stored in the cargo tanks.
Cargo tank lids shall be closed except during the checking or cleaning of the loading tanks and the survey or sample.
Except during loading, dangling or degas, valves of the loading and unloading pipes have been closed.
It shall be prohibited to use engines which use a fuel with a flash point less than 55 ° C.
1. Pump rooms are checked for leakage on a daily basis.
2. The bilge and leak bins shall be kept in clean and product-free condition.
(3) Monthly checks shall be carried out on whether the cargo refuelling areas or the empty trunk, subject to condensation water, are dry.
4. Monthly cargo cargo stores, in which cargo containers are to be placed for the storage of petrol, shall be checked using a gas detection meter checked for leakage. The result of the measurement shall be recorded in the test book referred to in Article 35 (e).
5. At least once a year, the cargo tanks are checked for the presence of water. The result of the check shall be recorded in the test book referred to in Article 35 (e).
(6) If water is detected during the control referred to in paragraph 5, it shall be removed as soon as possible.
1. It is prohibited to store hazardous substances in the loading zone without permission of the Minister. The licence shall be entered in the licence, specifying the type of storage authorised and the quantity.
2. Storage of a supply of bottles of commercial propane with an authorised filler weight between 5 and 35 kg for the purpose of delivery to ships shall be permitted to a maximum gross weight of 5 000 kg.
3. The storage, referred to in paragraph 2, shall be carried out on deck in a lockable area belonging to the loading area.
(4) The space referred to in the third paragraph shall be sufficiently ventilated. In case of leakage, the gas can escape from space.
5. The bottles are lined up and covered against traps and are protected from heat, sun rays and weather conditions.
(1) At least one of the crew members shall be in possession of a declaration of special knowledge of the ADNR as specified in 8.6.2 of Annex 1 to the VBG during loading, dangling and gas off-board, unless one is informed by the local competent authority of the AAS. The authority of this obligation has been dismissed. This obligation does not apply if the bunker station has a maximum total amount of 30 m 3 gas oil, diesel or gasoline may contain.
2. The crew is familiar with the operation of fire extinguishers and extinguisher fire extinguishers.
(3) The instructions referred to in Article 35 (b) are hung on a place accessible to all staff members.
4. instructions for use as referred to in Article 35 (j) shall be within reach of the place from which the installation or the device to which the instructions for use relates is served.
1. On bunker stations, an entry ban shall apply to spaces and parts which:
a. Do not belong to the home, shop or office;
b. Do not form a direct link between home, shop or office;
c. do not constitute a direct connection between home, shop, office and bunker vessels; and
d. Do not form direct connection between home, shop, office and shore.
(2) The first paragraph shall not apply to staff, competent civil servants and emergency responders.
3. In compliance with the first and second paragraphs, the owner or the person responsible shall determine which persons at which times of access.
In the cargo area and in spaces that do not belong to the property, the shop or an office applies a smoking ban and use of open fire is prohibited.
Cleaning work in the lower cargo area using liquids with a flash point below 55 ° C shall be prohibited.
With the exception of additional work, work in the cargo area which prohibits the possibility of a spark-formation shall be prohibited.
1. Repair and maintenance work on deck or cargo area, where sparks may occur, or which must be carried out by means of fire or electrical current shall not be carried out during bunkering or by side of vessels that are loaded with hazardous materials or during loading of the bunker station containing hazardous materials.
2. repair and maintenance work in service spaces outside the loading zone shall not be permitted with open doors, windows or other openings and during loading, bunkering or degas.
1. Loading tanks, trunk tanks, side tanks, pump rooms under deck, double bottoms and cargo refuelling areas shall be entered only for the purpose of carrying out checks and cleaning operations.
2. It is prohibited to enter cargo tanks, trunk tanks, side tanks, double bottoms and cargo refuelling areas where lack of oxygen is or where hazardous concentrations of substances are measured, without:
a. The person entering the space shall use an independent oxygen supply from an outside air;
b. The person entering the space is secured by means of a safety line;
c. supervises a second person and has an external independent oxygen supply within reach; and
d. On board, at a call distance, there are still at least two other persons or one other person and a salvage device may be present that can provide assistance.
1. The crew is familiar with the situations in which and the manner in which the special equipment, referred to in Article 22, first paragraph, must be used.
(2) Persons referred to in Article 62 (2) (a) and (c) shall be adequately trained in the use of the required equipment and physically capable of carrying out the work safely.
For bunker stations which were already in operation on 1 February 2002, the following shall apply:
a. the articles of this Annex, with their subject matter mentioned in the table annexed to this Article, do not apply unless the relevant parts are replaced or converted. Where existing parts are replaced by parts which are identical in technique and constructs, this shall not be a replacement for the purposes of this Article.
b. construction and equipment shall be kept at least at the present condition as regards safety.
Article
Subject matter
| 3, 8th paragraph |
Materials in dwellings etc. |
| 5 |
Cargo refuelling and cargo tanks |
| 6 |
Classification |
| 7, first, second, fifth and sixth members |
Loading tank openings and gas assembly |
| 8, thirteenth Member |
Place cargo pumps and distance to apertures |
| 10 |
Device Trunk Dams |
| 11, fourth member |
Pump Chamber Pierliners under Deck |
| 12, first to fourth paragraphs |
Access openings |
| 13, first, second and third members |
Exhaust gas pipelines |
| 14, third member |
Fuel tank ignition lines |
| 15 |
Lens and ballast fittings |
| 17, first and third members |
Engines |
| 19, third member |
Openings or accesses on the side where the ships are mooring |
| 20, first paragraph, introductory wording and part b, fifth, sixth and seventh members |
Level alert direction |
| 25 |
Distribution systems |
| 26, first paragraph and third to tenth Member |
Types and locations of electrical devices |
| 28, first, second, fourth and fifth members |
Electrical cables |
| 32, second and fifth members |
Fire and unprotected light |
| 33, second and third members |
Fixed-in fire extinguishing |
| 34 |
Fire-melting plant |
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
1. This Annex shall apply to patrol vessels of a length of 20 metres or more.
2. Without prejudice to compliance with the requirements set out in this Annex, patrol vessels shall comply with Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC.
3. Without prejudice to the compliance of patrol vessels with the task of disaster relief, such as fire-extinguishing vessels, as provided for in this Annex, additional requirements laid down by the Minister in respect of a particular ship, depending on the requirements of the intended deployment and the sailing area.
1. Patrolling vessels shall be equipped with at least one by-boat or one automatic inflatable rescue raft.
2. The automatic inflatable rescue raft is being easily and safely water on both vessels and is prepared so that it can ramp up, blow up and move freely from the ship at the bottom of the water. from the point of adjustment.
3. The automatic inflatable rescue raft is large enough to include all persons on board regularly.
4. The automatic inflatable rescue raft shall contain at least the following equipment:
a. A set of floating rowing belts;
b. A work line of at least 30 m in length; and
c. A hookvessel.
5. The automatic inflatable rescue raft shall be inspected annually by an approved expert. A certificate of proof of approval, signed by the person carrying out the inspection, shall be on board.
Article 4.05 of Annex II to Directive 2006 /87/EC does not apply.
In the case of open patrol vessels the propulsion engine of which is located in an open cockpit, it is not necessary to separate the stay from the gas of that compartment. The engine is completely enclosed by a flame retardant over-gasting.
Patrol vessels need not have a hecancer.
1. Without prejudice to the prescribed equipment specified in Articles 10.02 to 10.05 of Annex II to this Regulation: Directive 2006 /87/EC Patrol vessels shall have on board the following equipment:
a. A compensated compass;
b. updated sea charts of the areas in which the ship is sailing;
c. Suitable means of card adjustment;
d. adequate resources for the determination of water depth;
e. a radio telephone system enabling discussions in public traffic;
f. Three valScreen signals.
2. Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 2, second to fifth paragraphs, each rescue raft shall be equipped with:
a. Two drop-off signals; and
b. Three hand-tail lamps.
Without prejudice to the requirements laid down in this Annex, patrol vessels shall comply with the requirements of this Chapter if they are constructed or intended to berth by the following sides of:
(a) ships having one or more blue lights or one or more blue cones or a seinlay B, or a red light, as a result of the relevant provisions of the ship's shipping service;
b. Ships carrying dangerous substances referred to in Annex 1 to the VBG, but which do not have the obligation referred to in point (a).
1. Patrol vessels which are fit to take berth by vessels referred to in Article 7 (a) and (b), with the exception of tankers during loading, unloading and discharges, comply with the requirements of this Regulation. referred to in the second sentence of 7.1.2.19.1. of Annex 1 to the VBG, except for the toxicity-measurement requirement in 8.1.5.1 (to the extent that this refers to the toxicity measurement requirement), 8.1.5.3, 9.1.0.32.1, 9.1.0.52.2, 9.1.0.71 and 9.1.0.74 rules and except that:
a. In the case of any openings of the service spaces, accommodation or wheelhouse, if in a requirement of openings directed to the cargo or protection zone, the reference to all the openings of the service spaces, the accommodation or the wheelhouse shall be used;
b. if the requirement of a protected zone regulation refers to the outer deck of the ship;
c. If a requirement is specified in a regulation, it shall be measured horizontally from the shipower;
d. At a ship width of less than 4,00 m the openings specified in 9.1.0.31.2, 9.1.0.34.1 and 9.1.0.41.1 are located at the heart of the ship.
2. The ships referred to in paragraph 1 shall be provided with a Certificate of Approval as referred to in Annex 1 of the VBG, indicating that the certificate has been issued under the terms of 7.1.2.19.1.
1. Patrolling vessels suitable for berth by tank vessels during the loading, unloading and discharge of waste, which shall have a seintroduction using a single blue light or a blue cone or a seinlay B or a red light 'lamp' means, or by a vessel having a seintroduction of two or three blue lamps or two or three blue cones, or a red light, or a red light, shall comply with the requirements of 7.1.2.19.1, second sentence, of Appendix 1 to the VBG, except for the in 8.1.5.1 (to the extent that this refers to the requirement concerning the toxicity measurement device), 8.1.5.3, 9.1.0.32.1, 9.1.0.52.2, 9.1.0.71 and 9.1.0.74, subject to the following:
a. If in a requirement of openings directed to the loading or protected zone, all openings of the service spaces, accommodation or wheelhouse shall be addressed;
b. if the requirement of a protected zone regulation refers to the outer deck of the ship;
c. If a requirement is specified in a regulation, it shall be measured horizontally from the shipower;
d. At a ship width of less than 4,00 m the openings specified in 9.1.0.31.2, 9.1.0.34.1 and 9.1.0.41.1 are located at the heart of the ship.
(2) The ships referred to in paragraph 1 shall also comply with the requirements set out in:
a. 9.3.3.0.3 (d);
b. 9.3.3.10.1 and 9.3.3.10.2;
c. 9.3.3.12.6, on the understanding that the said distance is measured horizontally from the shipowned;
d. 9.3.3.17.3;
9.3.3.31.4, except that with a maximum surface temperature of 300 ° C, and
e. 9.3.3.31.5;
f. 9.3.3.50.1 (c) and 9.3.3.50.2;
g. 9.3.3.51.1 and 9.3.3.51.2 and
h. 9.3.3.51.3, except that this is only electric appliances on deck which have to meet the 'restricted explosion safe' application and have an area temperature of not more than 300 ° C;
i. 9.3.3.52.3, on the understanding that the said distance is measured horizontally from the shipowning; and
j. 9.3.3.52.4 and 9.3.3.52.5.
3. The ships referred to in paragraph 1 shall be provided with a Certificate of Approval as referred to in Annex 1 of the VBG, indicating that the certificate has been issued under 7.1.2.19.1 and that the ship is suitable for berth On the passing of tankers during the loading, unloading and discharge of waste, which is a seintroduction using a single blue cone or with a single blue cone or a seinlay B or a red light, or by the longitudinal side of ships which have a seintroduction with either two or three blue lights or two or three blue cones or a seinvlag B or a red light -
1. It is forbidden to smoke, make fire or have unprotected light:
a. On board patrol vessels as referred to in Article 8, first paragraph, at the berth shall take the ships referred to in that Article;
b. On board patrol vessels as referred to in Article 9, first paragraph, at the berth shall take the other side of the vessels referred to in that Article and the ships referred to in Article 8.
(2) The instructions referred to in paragraph 1 shall be placed in a suitable place in the wheelhouse.
(3) In addition, instructions shall be present in a suitable place in the wheelhouse of patrol vessels as referred to in Article 9 (1), stating that:
a. During the berth, the longitudinal side of the ships referred to in paragraph 3 shall also have all access from deck and all openings of outdoor spaces, with the exception of:
1 °. suction orifices of in-service engines;
2 °. ventilation orifices of machinery spaces, if the engines are in operation;
3 °. ventilation openings of an overpressure system as specified in 9.3.3.52.3 (b); and
4 °. Ventilation openings, equipped with a gas detection system specified in 9.3.3.52.3 (b);
b. After addressing the gas detection installation mentioned in subparagraph (a) (4), all equipment on board which does not comply with the operation shall be limited by means of explosion and shall be switched off and the ventilation openings closed;
c. During the berth, by the passing of ships as referred to in Article 9, access and openings may only be opened for a short period of time with the skipper's permission; and
d. After leaving the berth, the spaces accessible from deck shall be ventilated in such a way as to ensure that no danger to the environment exists.
Patrol vessels of a length of less than 20 metres which are to be examined shall comply with this Annex, with the exception of the provisions of this Chapter.
Patrol vessels with a length of more than 15 metres shall be equipped with a treadboard of at least 3,0 metres in length and 0,4 m in width and shall be equipped with light-painted tyres along the sides and a hand-reling.
Patrol vessels shall be equipped with one or two bone anchors whose total weight P in kg is calculated by means of the following formula:
P = C × B × T
In this formula:
B: the largest width of the ship in m;
T: the maximum draught of the ship in m.
C: a coefficient to be determined by reference to the formula:
C = 15 + (L-15) × 1,5
In this formula:
L: the largest length of the ship in m, the rudder and the bow sprit is not included.
For the value of C no less than 15 shall be taken.
The safety distance of patrol vessels shall not be less than:
a. For vessels that do not have a bulkhead deck, to the lowest point of the top of the shipboard:
in zone 2: 0,80 m,
in zone 3: 0,50 m,
in zone 4: 0,40 m;
b. To non-waterproof lockable openings
in zone 2: 0,60 m,
in zone 3: 0,30 m,
in zone 4: 0,30 m;
c. to the underside of gates and windows, which are located in the ship ' s house
in zone 2: 0,30 m,
in zone 3: 0,25 m,
in zone 4: 0,20 m.
1. In Article 16, the following shall be understood as "existing patrol vessels":
Patrol vessels of which on 1 January 1995:
a. Construction has been completed,
b. the keel is laid or the construction is at a similar stage, or
c. the construction contract has been completed and has been started with construction within one year.
2. In Article 17, the following shall be understood as "existing patrol vessels":
Patrol vessels for which a valid Approval Certificate as referred to in Annex 1 of the VBG has been issued after 1 January 1995, but before 15 March 1998.
1. Existing patrol vessels for which a certificate was issued before 11 October 1988 on the basis of the by decision of the Secretary of State for Transport and Water of 7 April 1976, No By way of derogation from the corresponding provisions of Chapters 2 to 7, the following rules may, by way of derogation from the corresponding provisions of Chapters 2 to 7, enter into force: 'Safety and safety standards and regulations for Rijksvessels 1976':
a. The hull and structure or deck houses including wheelhouses can be permanently watertight, where the use of wooden doors is not permitted;
b. Airpipes on dry tanks, including peaks, in which equipment which is not limited in explosion is carried out, are watertight lockable, with automatic shut-off devices not permitted, unless they are also provided with the hand be capable of being closed, and the means of exit shall be provided where necessary;
c. The chimneys of stoves shall be lifted up to a minimum of 2 m above the exposed deck;
(d) engines which are necessary for the holding shall be sucking their internal combustion air directly from the outside, avoiding the extraction of air from the engine chamber at the end of the air supply;
(e) the inlet mouths of the engines required for the holding have been protected and are at least 1 m higher than the voeler of the explosion meter;
f. In the suction piping for the combustion air of the propulsion engines and any auxiliary engines required for the operation, controllable lock-up devices, in the form of a valve or so called emergency stop, shall be directly applicable from the control house. The engine or engines, where the propulsion engines from the wheelhouse can also be put back into service condition;
g. The temperature of the exhaust gases, controlled by alarms, must not exceed the following conditions when leaving the exhaust gas outlet:
1 °. 100 ° C if the exhaust is below the level of the free-on deck; and
2 °. 200 ° C if the exhaust is at a higher level;
h. In order to be able to comply with the provisions of sub-section g, below 1 °, the substandard of the water injected shall be applied;
The electrical installation on deck shall be restricted in an explosion-free operation;
j. For installations with a voltage of less than 50 Volt, the normal non-voltage metal parts of electrical equipment, as well as metal coats, of ropes and cables, are not normally controlled, with the exception of those parts which are the result the method of affixing with the ship's hull shall be metallized;
(k) the electrical installation on deck which is not required for navigation needs not to be restricted in explosion, when it can be turned from the wheelhouse with a single switch;
l. the type of paint to be used for the preservation of the hull above the waterline, structure and accessories must not cause any sparks at the time of the impact load;
m. at the deck level around the vessel, at least one bear is present, with mountain faults and apostles having been conducted freely;
For all persons on board flight masks, equipped with instructions for use, are present;
o. Flight masks shall meet the following requirements:
1 °. the operation is independent of the ambient atmosphere,
2 °. Operating time shall be at least 15 minutes; and
3 °. the mask is of a type approved by the Minister;
For the purpose of controlling the presence of a possible explosive gas mixture outside the vessel, an explosion meter shall be present on board which:
1 ° is fixed with both optical and acoustic alarms near the steering position,
2 °. when the discharge of the normal voltage is automatically switched on an emergency flow circuit, unless the meter is fed by a battery, and
3 °. of a type approved by the Minister;
q. The correct setting position of the explosion-safe sensor belonging to the explosive device will be determined in consultation with the supplier;
r. A power-operated fire pump is present with at least one fire hydrant on deck with corresponding 2½ ' Stork coupling and a fire hose equipped with a nozzle or nozzle and whose capacity and pressure is such that the fire engine is equipped with a nozzle or nozzle The deck of water may be covered;
s. Multi-bunches are made of vegetable fibres, including Manila;
t. clear markings with the text 'Closed longitudinal side of ships with dangerous substances' are placed at all openings and entrances in deck and construction; and
you. On board is the Transport of dangerous goods by inland waterway present.
2. instructions shall be present in a suitable position in the wheelhouse of these patrol vessels, indicating that the longitudinal side of the ships referred to in Article 9, first member, on board the ship does not fire or It may be present without protection and that it is prohibited to smoke on board the ship. It is also stated in the instructions that, in the event of any threat, related to the dangerous substances on board the ship in which the longitudinal berth is situated, the driver vessel must immediately return to a safe distance. remove.
3. For patrol vessels as referred to in the first paragraph, a Certificate of Approval shall be required as specified in the VBG, indicating that the certificate has been issued under 7.1.2.19.1 and that the ship is fit to take berth. longitudinal side of tankers during the loading, unloading and dischargeing of a seintroduction using a single blue cone or a single blue cone or a seinlay B or a red light, or by vessels of a kind used for the operation of a vessel or with a lamp seentry with either two or three blue lights or two or three blue cones or a seinvlag B or a red lamp. light.
For the purposes of Chapter 4, the requirements of the provisions of Annex 1 to the VBG, referred to, shall be subject to the transitional rules set out in Annex 1 to the VBG, which are set out in 1.6.7.1 and 1.6.7.2, with It is understood that:
a. For existing patrol vessels, the transitional rules and deadlines set out in the said tables apply;
Construction and equipment of existing patrol vessels shall be kept at least at the current level of safety;
(c) certificates of approval issued in accordance with the rules applicable before 15 March 1998, as referred to in Annex 1 to the VBG, remain valid until the end date specified therein;
d. in the tables "N.V.O.", that the requirement does not apply to in-service patrol vessels, unless the relevant parts are replaced or converted, except that the requirement applies only to new construction, in the case of replacement or conversion, and to the extent that where existing parts are replaced by parts which are identical in technique and constructs, this shall not be a substitute for the purposes of the transitional rules.
The technical requirements laid down in this Annex shall be treated in the same way as technical requirements laid down by, or by reason of, a Member State of the European Union or by a State party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area.
| KINGDOM OF THE NETHERLANDS |
|||
| The Minister for Infrastructure and the Environment |
|||
| Certificate No: CVOB nr. | |||
| 1. |
Name of the bunkering station: |
||
| 2. |
Official ship number: |
||
| 3. |
Bunker station for storage of: |
||
| 4. |
The bunkering station is equipped with |
||
| 5. |
This certificate shall be valid until: |
||
| 6. |
The preceding certificate No ..... was issued on ..... by ...... |
||
| 7. |
The ship has been admitted for storage of the dangerous goods listed under 3 under: |
||
| - |
Own research on |
||
| - |
the declaration of the approved investigation office ... ... of ..... |
||
| 8. |
Where the following equivalences or deviations have been approved: |
||
| 9. |
Notes: |
||
| 10. |
Issued at: Rotterdam on |
||
| The Minister for Infrastructure and the Environment, on behalf of the Inspector-General Traffic and Water State |
|||
| 11. |
(stamp) |
||
| ..... |
|||
| (signature) |
|||
| Package 1a. Tankers hazardous substances under class |
| This package is reserved for class offices by law |
| Package 1b. Tankers dangerous substances not a class |
| Engine tanker |
| Type N-closed |
| type N-open with flaming |
| Type N-open |
| Tank Push-bin |
| Type N-closed |
| type N-open with flaming |
| Type N-open |
| Tug tanker |
| Type N-closed |
| type N-open with flaming |
| Type N-open |
| Bunkerboat |
| Bilgebot |
| Cleaning-warning |
| Bunker station |
| Bunkerponton |
| Package 2. Transport of dry cargo |
| Sea-going vessel (transport dry load) |
| Engine cargo ship |
| Freight Pusher |
| Ponton |
| Copp |
| Quilt |
| Sea-shell container |
| Engine tanker (without transport ADN) |
| Towed freighter |
| Trawl tanker (without transport ADN) |
| Amsterdamse dekschuit |
| Package 3. Other ships and passenger ships up to a length of 45m. |
| Tugboat |
| Tugboat with push-head |
| Sleep-Duwboot |
| Pusher |
| Passenger ships |
| Hotel ship |
| Round day boat (day trips) |
| Sailing passenger ship |
| Amsterdams grachtentype |
| Open roundboat |
| Skûtsje |
| Spring pont |
| Motor vehicle |
| Bike/foot |
| Patrol vessel |
| Patrol vessel |
| Oil control vessel |
| Fire extinguisher |
| Lifeboat |
| Pleasure craft |
| Ship fast (mandatory class after 2023) > 40km/h |
| Floating tool |
| Work vessel |
| Pump-poor-boat |
| Floating object |
| Package 4. Passenger ships from 45 m |
| Passenger ship |
| Hotel ship |
| Round day boat (day trips) |
| Sailing passenger ship |
| Ferries |
| Spring pont |
| Motor vehicle |
| Bike/foot |
Chapter 4: Chapter 4 of the Inland Waterway Vessel .
Safety distance: the distance between the plane of the largest authorised draught and the parallel plane passing through the lowest point above which the ship is no longer regarded as watertight;
Load line: the depth of the baseline corresponding to the level of the largest permitted draught;
Freeboard: The distance, measured vertical, between the load line and the parallel plane passing it through the lowest point of the gangplane, or in the absence of a gangboard, the lowest point of the solid board.
1. The content to be measured for ships intended or used for the carriage of goods shall be the contents of the external watertight part of the fuselage between the load line, determined by the Minister under the conditions laid down in the Annex to this Decision. Article 4.7 of Chapter 4 and the plane of embarkation of the empty vessel.
2. The content of vessels to be measured shall not be intended or used for the carriage of goods:
a. The contents outside of the watertight part of the fuselage included between the load line, having regard to Article 4.7 of Chapter 4 , and the plane to the height of the underside of the vessel;
b. The contents of the outer section of the watertight part of the fuselage included between the load line and the plane of the sinking of the empty vessel.
1. In determining the load line, zones 2, 3 and 4 shall be defined as: Article 1.3 of the Arrangement Taken into account.
2. A string angle steels, serving to connect the deck or gangboard with the side-plating of a vessel, shall not be considered as deck or gangboard for the purpose of determining the load line; the difference shall also remain outside the bulkhead or the buch. - Neither cement nor any other covering of bituminous or similar compositions is considered to be a deck or a gangboard.
3. When fitted with adequate light or stalks in the board, the load line shall be taken not higher than 10 cm below the plane of the bottom of the glass of light tranden or 30 centimeters below the plane of the underside of the surface. Day openings of stalkate gates.
(4) In the case of a patrolling track or a body of body, it shall be considered that only openings in the walls of the ship necessary for the accession of light and air for the construction and destination of the vessel are to be considered.
5. Small openings in the deck or in a hatch headboard that can be sealed to a sufficient degree against the inlet of water, such as openings for the passage of means to treat the mast, pumpkoo openings, filling openings, etc. manholes and the like, shall not be taken into account in determining the load line.
6. In special cases, the minister may fix the load line higher or lower, but never higher than the top of the deck on the lowest part of the ship.
1. For vessels not intended or used for the transport of goods the load line shall not be lower than that which is actually achieved if the ship is fully equipped and the crew and the fuel and Water resources are fully on board.
These stocks are based on the total capacity of the fuel tanks and of the water tanks, including water ballast.
2. Without prejudice to the first paragraph, for ships intended or used for the carriage of persons for which there is no safety line to be determined, including the weight of the number of passengers permitted on board Permitted, including baggage and the provider of such passengers.
(3) Without prejudice to the first paragraph, lifting equipment shall be used to include the lifting capacity.
4. The freeboard shall not be less than the value from the requirements of Article 4.8 of Chapter 4 follows.
5. Graanelevators, cranes, coal carriers, dredgers, pistons, holebok and cranes, and vessels without room for loading and carrying of cargo shall be regarded as vessels referred to in Article 2, second paragraph, provided that they do not are to be used or to be used to transport cargo on deck.
6. Ferries and ferries which, except passengers, are transferred or not loaded with goods and ships in which or on which goods are stored shall be regarded as vessels referred to in Article 2, first paragraph.
1. Where the vessel is in the condition specified in: Article 4.4 of Chapter 4 and Article 2 of this Annex is introduced, shall determine the location of the calibration marks and, if necessary, the length of longitudinal benchmarks. The calibration marks, the underside of which coincide with the load line, shall be placed in pairs on the sides of the vessel. The calibration marks are clearly visible and symmetrical in relation to the longitudinal centreplane. Each calibration mark shall consist of a rectangle, the horizontal line of which is 30 centimeters long and the height is 4 centimeters, and is marked with a vertical line of 20 centimeters in length placed perpendicular to the centre of the lower horizontal line. The lines are either inserted or centered.
2. The planes passing through the vertical lines of the calibration marks are placed on equal distance apart and symmetrically divided relative to the center of gravity of the waterline located at the half height between the plane of empification of the empty vessel and load line.
3. For vessels, the length of which is less than 40 metres, the number of calibration marks on each side shall be two. If the length is 40 metres or more, the number of calibration marks on each side shall be at least three. Unless reference is made to the number of reference marks mentioned above, in the case of ships which are not intended or used for the carriage of goods, a single calibration mark on the half-length shall be affixed on each side.
4. If scale scale as specified in Article 4.24 of Chapter 5 shall be inserted, the zero point thereof shall be equal to the underside of the shell on the spot of the shell or if there is a keel, equal to the bottom of the keel on the spot of the scale. The span scales shall be placed under the calibration marks on the hull.
5. The vertical distances between the plane of the sinking of the empty vessel and that of the underside of the vessel shall be determined at the lowest point of the cross sections on the spot of the calibration marks at the lowest point. In this respect, excellent parts of the area are not considered.
6. The position of the load line shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Articles 2 and 3 of this Annex. The greatest length and the greatest width of the fuselage are measured. The largest length is taken without the rudder, but in ships whose mirror does not extend behind the rudder stews, including the finger-natives attached to the steven.
1. In the case of inland waterway vessels intended or used for the transport of goods, the part of the ship's hull to be measured, namely the part between the load line and the plane of the sinking of the empty vessel, shall be divided into three parts in at least three, namely: the foreship, the midship and the stern. Such division shall be carried out by vertical planes perpendicular to the plane of insention of the empty vessel in such a way as to give the Minister the most accurate result in connection with the construction of the ship.
In the case of vessels with a rear and rear ship, the bovine part or stern shall be measured separately.
2. The portion to be measured shall be divided into disks of one decimal place on average, starting with the plane of sinking of the empty vessel, on the understanding that the upper disc may have a different mean height. In ships, the planes of which are of empty and of greatest permitted draught are not parallel, and where the height is not the same everywhere, the average of the loading heights shall be taken as the height of the height of the load heights of the vessels. the calibration marks are included.
The location of the calibration marks shall be adjusted, if necessary, in relation to the location of the centre of gravity of the waterline located at the height of the half-load, in a manner which is determined by the Minister. The planes are further indicated as horizontal planes.
3. In any horizontal plane, perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the ship, at least the following gauths shall be measured:
a. Five in the foreship and one at each of the ends and at ¼ on ½ and on ¾ of longitude Lv (V1 to V5);
b. Three in the midshipboard and at ¼, on ½ and at ¾ length Lm (M2, M3 and M4);
c. Five in the stern and one at each of the ends and at ¼, on ½ and on ¾ length La (A1 through A5).
4. Since the use of the Simpson rule ensures sufficient accuracy, it is generally not necessary in the mid-ship to measure more than three large ships, including long ships. Should it be considered exceptionally desirable, five large gauths can also be measured in this section, all taken on equal parts of the length of the middle vessel (M2 through M6).
5. According to the Simpson rule, the area of each horizontal plane is found by applying the following formulas:
a. If in the mid-ship, three levels of measurement are measured:
Area = 1/12 Lv × (V1 + 4V2 + 2V3 + 4V4 + V5) + 1/12 Lm × (M1 + 4M2 + 2M3 + 4M4 + M5) + 1/12 La × (A1 + 4A2 + 2A3 + 4A4 + A5);
b. If in the midshipboard five gauths are measured:
Surface = 1/12 Lv × (V1 + 4V2 + 2V3 + 4V4 + V5) + 1/18 Lm × (M1 + 4M2 + 2M3 + 4M4 + 2M5 + 4M6 + M7) + 1/12 La × (A1 + 4A2 + 2A3 + 4A4 + A5).
6. When the minister considers it necessary, he may divide the front, middle or stern in a larger number of planes. In this case, the distribution shall take place in such a way that each part contains an equal number of planes of equal length.
7. Is the form of a ship at one end in such a way that the Minister considers it appropriate to measure this part separately, then he shall apply the Simpson rule for this purpose too, unless it is delimited by straight lines in which case the Trapezoum rule may be applied.
8. The surface of the end of each horizontal plane thus determined shall be added to the surface, determined in accordance with the sixth paragraph, point (a) or (b).
9. To begin the planes from subs, to letters A, B, etc., then the contents of the following are:
a. the 1st disk =
× h;
b. 2nd disk =
× h, etc.,
where h represents the height of the disk: the height, except the upper disk, is one decimal meter. The height of the upper disc can be determined with an accuracy of tenth parts of an inch.
10. In each disk a displacement for every inch of zinc is obtained by dividing the contents of the disk by its height, expressed in centimeters.
11. The sum of the contents of the disks indicates the total displacement.
12. The dimensions shall be taken out of work as far as possible.
13. The following figure shall be included in the preceding paragraphs:
For inland waterway vessels which are not intended or used for the carriage of goods and dispose of a normal ship, measurements of the required water movements shall be made as follows on board by reliable means, if necessary. Drawings, carried out:
1. After the length (l1) of the plane of empty inculcation of the fully equipped ship is determined, the depth of the depth (d1) shall be fixed at half of this length, and the maximum width (b1) in this plane of inzinking.
2. The length of the waterline in that plane is divided in between 6 and 8 parts and the widths to be determined on the subsections. In the case of a cracked form of the waterline, the length at the kneething point shall first be divided into parts and the parts thus resulting shall be measured in the manner described. In calculating the water line surface (O), Simpson ' s rule should be used.
The coefficient of perfection (c) of the waterline shall be determined by:
The formula
The block coefficient (c1) of the empty vessel shall be determined by means of the formula c1 = c √c.
The water transfer (V1) of the empty vessel shall then be found as follows: V1 = I1 × b1 × d1 × c1.
The displacement of water (V2) to the load line shall be equal to V1 plus the total weight of the load (B) as defined in Article 6: V2 = V1 + B.
The load height (h) is found from the formula:
This follows the depth of the draught (d2) to the load line d2 = d1 + h.
However, this depth may not be greater than the permissible depth of application in the application of Article 5. If the draught (d2) is smaller than the permissible draught, resulting from the application of Article 5, the displacement of water to the load line shall be: V2 = V1 + h × O.
In such a case, where the load line is lower than would be the case in application of Article 5, the person concerned may, in accordance with the fourth paragraph of Article 4.8 of Chapter 5 , the lower placing of the load line in writing requests.
The water placement between the planes of empty and laden draught is: V3 = h × O.
3. For vessels having a rectangular shape such as bagger mills, houseboats and the like, water moves can be found in a simpler way.
It shall take into account any rounding of the hull, the ascending parts of the plane and an open bun.
4. In the case of the inland waterway vessels referred to in paragraph 3, no subsequent transfers of water per inch shall be determined between the plane of the empty vessel's insention and the load line, and shall not be used in relation to them; provide.
5. The following figure shall be one of the following in the first sentence of the first paragraph:
(1) After the completion of the measurement and before the date of issue of the measuring letter, the calibration marks or the calibration plates shall be made.
2. Instead of the calibration marks as defined in Article 5, the marks may also consist of calibration plates of at least 30 cm in length and 4 cm in height. The underside of the calibration plate indicates the load line. The calibration plate shall have a vertical line of 20 cm in length as well as the span mark, perpendicular to the centre of the base of the calibration plate.
The lines of the calibration mark shall be inserted on steel vessels. On wooden and concrete ships span plates shall be installed. On concrete ships and ships of material other than steel or wood, the confirmation of these plates by the person concerned shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the official of the Inspection Movement and Water State.
3. in all calibration marks or on all calibration plates, the metingswerk shall be taken with letters and figures of 2 ½ to 3 cm in height, consisting of the following terms:
a. Distinguishing letters HN, and;
b. The number of the measuring letter.
4. In the event that a vessel is regularly in zone 4 and exceptionally in a zone 2 or 3, and where, after the latter zone has also been used in an outboard calculation, it appears that a greater freeboard is necessary, the reference mark shall be used to ensure that the vessel is not performed in accordance with the figure referred to in the seventh paragraph. In such a case, for the calibration marks, added horizontal lines shall be cut by a length of 15 cm and a height of 3 cm, while at the same level the corresponding figure of the zone shall be cut at a height of 6 cm and a height of the zone. width of 4 cm. The vertical line added shall be cut by a width of 3 cm. The lines and figures added are painted in an equal manner as the reference mark. The depth of the draught is no more than the bottom edge of the added line in the area concerned. The following shall be recorded in the letter of measurement by reference to heading 37, as follows:
(37) ZONE (for example) 4, with separate lines adjacent to the calibration marks for zones 2 and 3.
5. If the person concerned requests for calibration scales, they shall be applied by inbeitings into the skin of the vessel in a manner that is specified by the Minister.
6. The following figure belongs to the second and third members:
7. The following figure belongs to the fourth member:
The metation mark is inserted on the aft ship in the vicinity of the rudder king. As a general rule, the back wall of the rove is the most suitable for this purpose. The mark shall be placed on an outside in the eye. A note on the place of the mark on the stern shall be recorded in the measuring letter.
Subject to the provisions of Article 8 (2), the embarkation of the calibration and calibration marks or the placing of the calibration plates by a competent professional shall be done under the supervision of the minister and designated by the Minister.
(1) In the event of a remeasurement of a vessel, the old inscriptions and marks and, where appropriate, the calibration plates, calibration marks and span scales shall be removed or invalidated by new replacement and the old measuring instruments shall be withdrawn.
2. In the event of a remeasurement of a vessel previously measured and registered in France, the original indelible marks shall not be removed or removed, but an indelible mark shall be placed on the left side of the calibration mark in the form of a trade mark in the form of a vessel. cross with a horizontal and vertical bar of equal length.
Group
Crew members
Number of crew
In the operating mode A1, A2 or B and for the equipment standard S1, S2
A1
A2
B
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
S2
| 1. Measurement of the assembly L ≤ 37 m B ≤ 15 m |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * *** Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 - - 1 - - |
2 - - - - - |
2 - - 1 1 * - |
2 - - - 2 * *** - |
|||||
| 2. Measurement of the assembly 37 m < L ≤ 86m B ≤ 15 m |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * *** Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or - 1 - - - |
1 - - 1 1 - |
1 - - 1 1 - ***** |
2 - - - 1 * - |
2 - - 2 - - |
2 - - 1 1 - |
|||
| 3. Duwboot + 1 push box with L > 86 m or assembly size 86 m < L ≤ 116,5 m B ≤ 15 m |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * *** Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or 1 - 1 - - ***** |
1 1 - - 2 - |
1 1 - 1 - |
2 - - 1 1 * - |
2 - - - 2 * - |
2 or 1 - 2 - - |
2 1 * * - 1 - - |
2 1 - 1 1 - |
|
| 4. Duwboot + 2 pushers (*) motor ship + 1 push-bin (*) |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor **** Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 1 - 1 1 * - |
1 1 - - 2 * - |
2 - - 2 1 * - |
2 - - 1 2 * - |
2 or 1 - 2 - 1 |
2 1 * * - 2 - - |
2 or 1 - 1 1 1 |
2 1 * * - 1 1 - |
|
| 5. Duwboot + 3 or 4 pushers (*) motor ship + 2 or 3 pushers (*) |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * *** Light-sailor Machinery or equipment Engine-float |
1 or 1 - 2 - 1 |
1 1 - 2 2 1 |
1 1 - 1 1 1 |
2 - - 2 1 * 1 |
2 - - 1 2 * 1 |
2 or 1 - 2 1 * 1 |
2 1 * * - 2 - 1 |
2 or 1 - 1 2 1 |
2 1 * * - 1 1 1 |
| 6. Duwboot + more than 4 pushbins (*) |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * *** Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or 1 - 3 - 1 ***** |
1 1 - 2 2 1 |
1 1 1 1 1 1 |
2 - - 3 1 * 1 |
2 - - 2 2 * 1 |
2 or 1 - 3 1 * 1 |
2 1 * * - 3 - 1 |
2 or 1 - 2 2 * 1 |
2 1 * * - 2 1 1 |
* The light sailor or one of the light-mats may be replaced by a deksman.
** The steering man possesses the competence of skipper as intended Article 2.9 (2) .
*** One of the light-type roses is older than 18 years.
**** The sailors may be replaced by light-type roses that have reached the age of 17, be at least in the third year of study, and can show a year of sailing time in inland navigation.
***** Minimum crew:
(a) in the group 2, operating mode A 1, Standard S2; and
(b) in Group 3, 5 and 6 operating mode A1, Standard S1
may be reduced for the uninterrupted duration of up to three months in a calendar year with a light dandelas visiting a shipwrecer school. Consecutive periods with reduced crew shall be suspended for a minimum period of one month. The visit to the shipwreck school is demonstrated by a statement from the shippersschool located on board, indicating the times of the school visit. These provisions do not apply to the light seaman referred to in Note ****.
(*) In groups 4, 5 and 6 of this table, the push-basket is defined as all the transport pushed or carried out during transport.
In addition, the following equivalency shall apply: 1 pusher = multiple push bins with a total length up to 76.50 m and a total width up to and including 15 m.
Group
Crew members
Number of crew
In the operating mode A1, A2 or B and for the equipment standard S1, S2
A1
A2
B
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
S2
| 1. Allowed number of passengers: Up to 75 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 - - 1 - - |
2 - - 1 - - |
2 - - 2 - - |
2 - - 1 1 - |
|||
| 2. Allowed number of passengers: From 76 to 250 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or - - 1 1 - |
1 - - - - 1 |
1 - - 1 1 - |
2 - - - 1 * 1 |
2 - - 1 1 * 1 |
||
| 3. Allowed number of passengers: From 251 to 600 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or - 1 - - 1 |
1 - 1 - 2 - |
1 - 1 - 1 - |
2 - - 1 - 1 |
2 - - - 1 1 |
3 - - 1 - 1 |
3 - - - 1 1 |
| 4. Allowed number of passengers: 601 to 1000 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 1 - 1 1 * 1 |
1 1 - - 2 * 1 |
2 - - 2 - 1 |
2 - - 1 1 1 |
3 - - 2 - 1 |
3 - - 1 1 1 |
|
| 5. Allowed number of passengers: 1001 to 2000 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
2 or - - 3 - 1 |
2 - - 2 2 1 |
2 - - 2 1 1 |
2 - - 3 1 * 1 |
2 - - 2 2 * 1 |
3 - - 3 1 * 1 |
3 - - 2 2 * 1 |
| 6. Allowed number of passengers: more than 2000 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor * * Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
2 - - 3 1 * 1 |
2 - - 2 2 * 1 |
2 - - 4 - 1 |
2 - - 3 1 1 |
3 - - 4 1 * 1 |
3 - - 3 2 * 1 |
|
* The light sailor or one of the light-mats may be replaced by a deksman.
** The sailors may be replaced by light-type roses, which have reached the age of 17, are at least in the third year of study, and can show a year of sailing time in inland navigation.
** * Minimum crew:
(a) in Group 2, operating mode A 1, Standard S2; and
(b) in groups 3 and 5, operating mode A1, Standard S1
may be reduced for the uninterrupted duration of up to three months in a calendar year with a light dandelas visiting a shipwrecer school. Consecutive periods with reduced crew shall be suspended for a minimum period of one month. The visit to the shipwreck school is demonstrated by a statement from the shippersschool located on board, indicating the times of the school visit.
Group
Crew members
Number of crew
In the operating mode A1, A2 or B and for the equipment standard S1, S2
A1
A2
B
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
S2
| 1. Allowed number of passengers: from 501 to 1000 |
Skipper |
1 |
1 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
||||
| Starman |
1 |
1 |
- |
- |
- |
- |
|||||
| Full-sailor |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
|||||
| Sailor * ** |
2 |
1 |
2 |
1 |
2 |
1 |
|||||
| Light-sailor |
- |
1 |
- |
1 |
- |
1 |
|||||
| Engineer or matroosmotor |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
|||||
| 2. Allowed number of passengers: 1001 to 2000 |
Skipper |
2 or |
2 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
|||
| Starman |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
||||
| Full-sailor |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
- |
|||||
| Sailor * ** |
3 |
2 |
2 |
3 |
2 |
3 |
2 |
||||
| Light-sailor * *** |
- |
2 |
1 |
1 * |
2 * |
1 * |
2 * |
||||
| Mechanist or Seaman- |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
||||
| Engine (*) |
|||||||||||
* The light sailor or one of the light-mats may be replaced by a deksman.
** The minister determines whether drivers or sailors are required-motor floats are required and fills that in the Certificate of Investigation in under number 52.
*** Sailors may be replaced by light-type roses, which have reached the age of 17, are at least in the third year of study and can show a year of sailing time in the inland navigation area.
**** The minimum crew in group 2, operating mode A1, standard S1 can be reduced for the uninterrupted duration of up to three months in a calendar year with a light dandelas visiting a shippersschool. Consecutive periods with a reduced crew shall be suspended for a minimum period of one month. The visit to the shipwreck school is demonstrated by a statement from the shippersschool located on board, indicating the times of the school visit.
Group
Crew members
Number of crew
In the operating mode A1, A2 or B and for the equipment standard S1, S2
| A1 |
A2 |
B |
||||||
| S1 |
S2 |
S1 |
S2 |
S1 |
S2 |
|||
| 1. Allowed number of beds: Up to 50 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 - 1 - - 1 |
1 - - - 2 1 |
2 - - 1 - 1 |
2 - - - 1 1 |
3 - - 1 - 1 |
3 - - - 1 1 |
|
| 2. Allowed number of beds: from 51 to 100 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 1 - 1 - 1 |
1 1 - - 1 1 |
2 - - 1 - 1 |
2 - - - 1 1 |
3 - - 1 - 1 |
3 - - - 1 1 |
|
| 3. Allowed number of beds: over 100 |
Skipper Starman Full-sailor Sailor Light-sailor Mechanist or Seaman-engine Floating |
1 or 1 - 2 - 1 |
1 1 - 1 2 1 |
1 1 - 1 1 1 |
2 - - 3 - 1 |
2 - - 2 1 1 |
3 - - 3 - 1 |
3 - - 2 1 1 |
Group of permitted number of passengers
Crew members
Number of crew
| 1. max. 300 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 - |
| 2. max. 600 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 1 |
| 3. max. 900 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 2 |
| 4. max. 1200 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 3 |
| 5. max. 1500 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 4 |
| 6. max. 1750 passengers |
Skipper Starman 1 P. Driver 2 P. Driver 2 Sailor Light-sailor |
1 1 1 1 1 5 |
2 The 2 P. Machinery may be derelict if there is a single manor control in relation to the propellants and steering gear.
Groups by length (L) of the ship
Crew members
Number of crew members operating
A1
A2
B
| L ≤ 55 m |
Skipper |
1 |
1 |
2 |
| Full-sailor |
0 |
1 |
0 |
|
| L > 55 m and L ≤ 86 m |
Skipper |
1 |
2 |
2 |
| Sailor |
1 |
0 |
1 |
|
| L > 86 m |
Skipper |
1 |
2 |
2 |
| Full-sailor |
0 |
0 |
1 |
|
| Sailor |
1 |
0 |
0 |
The minimum crew of tug boats shall consist of:
Groups to power P of the propelling engines in kW
Crew members
Number of crew members operating
A1
A2
B
| 1. P < 500 |
Skipper |
1 |
1 |
2 |
| Sailor |
1 * |
1 |
- |
|
| 2. 500 > P < 1250 ** |
Skipper |
1 |
2 |
2 |
| Sailor |
1 |
- |
1 |
|
| 3. 1250 > P < 3750 ** |
Skipper |
1 |
2 |
2 |
| Sailor-engine floorboard |
1 |
1 |
1 |
|
| Sailor |
1 |
1 |
2 |
|
| 4. P > 3750 |
Determined individually by the Minister of Infrastructure and the Environment. |
|||
* For the navigation on the Rhine outside the Netherlands, the minimum crew consists of a skipper and a sailor. The sailor doesn't need domestic.
** If a ship, classified in group 2 or in group 3, complies with the following provisions relating to the construction and the establishment, the minimum crew shall be reduced by one sailor:
a. All major control equipment and signalling and control instruments for main drive systems, power supply and other equipment significant installations have been installed in the wheelhouse;
b. A ship classified in group 2 is fitted with a towing, or a slewing hook combined with a caper or a wire-winch;
c. A trawl of group 3 is fitted with a towing machine or a slewing hook combined with a wire-winch;
d. Towing and wire-berling can be operated both from the deck and from the navigating bridge;
e. there is an emergency control which allows the towing or sleft hook to be celebrated and/or snub, which shall also be insured in the event of a power failure from the deck;
f. Steering positions on the bridge shall be positioned and executed so as to ensure that all the manoeuvring conditions are fully covered by the person conducting the vessel;
g. Operating control equipment shall be within the range of the operator. Sufficient space is available either at the operator's position for the tug or the wire-winch, or at the location where the instrumentation and control instruments can be observed, so that the contact winch operation or the wire-winch operation it is not made more difficult by the person carrying the vessel in carrying out its work;
(h) the ship is equipped with a radar installation, the radar image of which is clearly visible without a hood or a screen, regardless of the light conditions outside the wheelhouse;
it is ensured by adequate means that, under all weather conditions, clear vision of the windows which are in the main directions of sight;
j. common rescue means shall be drawn up in such a way as to allow them to be allowed to water by only one crew member;
k. adjustable deck lighting for the lighting of the towing line, which can be operated from the wheelhouse, is installed. The lamps for the work deck are so placed and performed so as to ensure that there is an undisturbed lighting of the work deck and there is no danger of the blinding of the vessel carrying the vessel. In particular, account has been taken of the case of fog; and
L. The Minister for Infrastructure and the Environment shall issue a declaration of compliance with these provisions.
The minimum crew of tugs during the time when port towed services are carried out shall consist of:
| Paaltrek * ** F < 15 tons |
1 skipper |
| 1 Seaman |
|
| 15 > F ≤ 25 tonnes |
1 skipper |
| 2 Seamen |
|
| 25 > F ≤ 75 tonnes |
1 skipper |
| 1 sailor-engine floaver |
|
| 2 Seamen |
|
| F > 75 tonnes |
Determined individually by the Minister of Infrastructure and the Environment. |
*** Paaltrek: the maximum tensile force the ship can exert through a contact wire on a towed object as indicated on a certificate issued by an organisation generally approved for that purpose within the atmosphere of the tug. If no licence or certificate is presented, a tensile strength of 20 kg/kW of installed propulsion power shall be assumed for the pole haul.
The minimum crew of spring ponts capable of achieving a speed of more than 30 km per hour, but not more than 40 km per hour shall consist of:
Number Of Passengers Permitted Groups
Crew members
Number of crew members operating
Day trip
Semi-continuous
Continuous operation
| 1. up to and including 75 persons |
Skipper Sailor |
1 1 |
2 1 |
2 2 |
| 2. from 76 to 250 persons |
Skipper Sailor-engine floorboard Light sailor |
1 1 * - |
2 1 * 1 * * |
2 2 * 1 * * |
| 3. from 251 to 600 persons |
Skipper Dandelas Sailor-engine floorboard |
1 1 1 * |
2 - 2 * |
3 - 2 * |
* In waters of zone 3 and 4, the sailor may be replaced by a seaman.
** The light sailor is at least 18 years old.
Number Of Passengers Permitted Groups
Crew members
Number of crew members operating
Day trip
Semi-continuous
Continuous operation
| 1. up to and including 75 persons |
Skipper Sailor |
2 - |
3 - |
4 - |
|
| 2. from 76 to 250 persons |
Skipper Sailor Light sailor |
2 - - |
3 - 1 * * |
4 - 1 * * |
|
| 3. from 251 to 600 persons |
Skipper |
2 |
3 |
4 |
|
| Dandelas |
1 or |
- |
- |
- |
|
| Sailor-engine floorboard |
-1 |
1 |
1 |
||
** The light sailor is at least 18 years old.
It is particularly important to recognise and (let) treat those conditions in a timely way which are a clear risk-overbearing factor. In general, the person concerned should be free to obtain a medical certificate from any abnormation, sickness or injury that hinders the safe exercise of the work. In addition, the presence of the person on board may not present any danger to the health of the other persons on board.
If doubts arise as to the assessment of the adequacy, consultations shall be held with the medical adviser. However, the responsibility for the decision remains with the elective physician.
The inspection is fully aware of the specific working conditions on board, which may vary greatly depending on the type of ship and the vessel:
a. Work on board exhibits irregular physical and psychological peak loads;
b. The work on board entails a considerable physical burden, with a lot of tear, the maneuvering around obstacles and limited room with sometimes an unfavorable work posture additional load of the movement apparatus with itself. bring;
c. by the nature of the work, there is not always an opportunity to eat and sleep at regular intervals.
Consideration shall be given to the fact that there are many activities on board which require a long-term concentration:
a. navigating, with particular attention being constantly given during the sailing at night, in fog and under bad weather conditions;
(b) work with and responsibility for the transport of dangerous substances;
c. Working on and near implements with moving parts, such as taps, winches, anchor spills, etc.;
(d) conducting work on electrical lines and steam pipes;
(e) the carrying out of work at high altitude or in and around deep culling.
In the case of use of medicinal products, the physician gives rise to the following guidelines:
a. To be dependent on the use of medicinal products which have side effects in the sense of: dizziness, impaired concentration and reaction, mental disorders, or influence on circulation, may be a reason for unfitness. For the use of antidiabetic agents and, anti-epileptic agents are referred to the relevant articles in the labelling requirements;
(b) being dependent on the use of medicinal products with a close therapeutic width is a reason for unsuitability;
c. if medicinal products are used to reconcile with the safety of the boating, it is necessary to consider when issuing a medical certificate whether the person concerned understands the effects of the medicinal product (s) and the requirements of the medicinal product. has been closely observed by the doctor.
The medical standards described in § 2 to § 5 are to be used in the examination of a medical certificate. Medically unsuitable for inland navigation is the person who does not meet these standards. The doctor shall, in a decision to disapprove, continue to lead by the following general directives:
medically unfit for inland navigation is the person, who suffers from a disease, abnormation or injury:
a. which may impede the safe exercise of the work;
b. which does not allow the person concerned to act adequately in the event of an emergency at all times;
c. may aggravate the exercise on board during post-performing purposes, in that it creates an unacceptable risk to the health or safety of himself or other persons on board, or serious nuisance to other persons on board; or
d. requiring continuous medical surveillance or requiring acute intervention by a medicus.
In the case of a progressive or chronic eye condition, a specialist report is required showing that vision is not threatened in such a way that the criteria cannot be met in the foreseeable future:
a. Visual acuity:
tested in daylight, with or without optical devices, at least 0.8 with both eyes together. With one eye view is allowed.
If an optical correction device is to be used at the time of inspection, adequate back-up glasses shall be shown to the doctor;
b. Contrast view:
to investigate only in cases of doubt:
Non-blinding mesotal at a brightness level of 0,032 cd/m 2 . Result is contrast 1:2.7;
c. Habituation to the darkness:
to investigate only in cases of doubt:
the result shall be no more than a log unit of the normal curve;
ed. Field of vision:
defects in the field of vision of the eye with the best visual acuity are not allowed. In case of doubt, experiment-based studies shall be carried out;
e. Colour discernment:
In the study of the colour discernment, performed in the exposure prescribed in the relevant test, a score of 2 errors in the Ishiharatest is a reason for further examination with a specialist colour test, except as a result of the analysis of the colour of an earlier investigation by an ophthalmologist, it is already clear that the following limits are not exceeded. A reason for unsuitability is a greater deviation than the following outcomes:
1 °. Famsworth Panel D15 test: undisturbed; thank you
2 °. Hardy, Rand and Rittler (HRR): 'mild'; thanks
3 °. Tokyo Medical College (TMC): 'second degree';
4 °. Stilling/Velhagen: undisturbed; thank you
5 °. Boström: undisturbed; thank you
6 °. Holmer-Wright B: up to 8 faults in 'small'; thanks
7 °. an equivalent result for an equivalent colour test.
In case of doubt, examination may be carried out using the anomaloscope (the anomal quotient must be between 0,7 and 1, 4) or with another equivalent test;
f. Motility:
Unimpeded motility of eyes; no double vision.
(1) The hearing ability is considered sufficient if the hearing loss of each ear does not exceed the average value of 40 dB (A) for frequencies 500, 1000, 2000 and 3000 Hz.
(2) If the average value of 40 dB is exceeded, the hearing aid must be regarded as sufficient, if the talk of a hearing aid at 2 metres with each ear is clearly understood.
3. By way of derogation from the second paragraph, one-sided deafness may be accepted for the purpose of obtaining the small vessel used exclusively for the pleasure of pleasure, provided that the hearing loss of the functioning ear at the frequencies 500, 1000, 2000 and 3000 Hz does not exceed the average value of 30 dB (A).
1. All ailments associated with consciousness or equilibrium disorders, as well as seizures of swivel or unrestrained sleep are a reason for unfitness.
2. All forms of epilepsy in the anamnese, whether medically treated or not, are a reason for unfitness. Exceptions to this are:
a. Approval is possible if the last attack took place before the fifth year of life and no anti-epileptic drugs have been used afterwards;
b. After an initial attack, approval shall be possible, following an unqualified declaration, for two years following that attack, if:
1 ° this single or unprovoked epileptic seizure,
2 ° which has not been treated with medications; and
3 ° no abnormalities of the brain are visible to the brain on an MRI scan, a recent standard EEG, as well as a recent EEG after whole or partial lultoting;
c. by way of derogation from Part B, after an initial attack, approval may be approved for the purpose of obtaining the small vessel used exclusively for pleasure, following an unsuitable declaration for a period of three months following that attack, if:
1 ° is an initial or unprovoked epileptic seizure, and
2 ° no relevant anomalies to the brain are visible on an MRI scan and standard EEG made after the attack without any 'epileptiform abnormalities';
After more than one seizure of the medication, after an inappropriate explanation for two years after discontinuation of that medication, approval may be given to an approved favourable prognosis, if after discontinuation of epilepsy, relevant anomalies to the brain are visible on an MRI scan, a recent standard EEG, as well as a recent EEG after whole or partial sleep content;
e. Approval is possible for the small vessel used exclusively for the pleasure experience, with a maximum period of validity of five years, when using anti-epileptic drugs after a two-year attack-free period.
3. The validity of the medical certificate in the case of the exceptions described in the preceding paragraph is first one year. If the person concerned remains at liberty, the period of validity is then three years, then five years and then unlimited.
4. Noctambulism is generally a reason for unfitness.
1. System diseases of the central nervous system, such as multiple sclerosis and Parkinson ' s disease, are, depending on the stage in which the disease is in place, generally a reason for unsuitability. By way of derogation, for the purpose of obtaining a small vessel used exclusively for pleasure, multiple sclerosis may be used for the purpose of carrying out the vessel, if the person concerned may, subject to any adjustment of the controls, be able to control.
2. Post-traumatic and post-operative residual phenomena: for approval, a favourable specialist report is required, showing that no acute problems can reasonably be expected.
3. Each cerebrovascular accident, including an anamnese: for approval, a favourable specialist report is required, showing that there is no reasonable expectation of acute problems.
1. Psychotic symptoms at the time of the inspection or psychoses in the anamnese with a chance of recurrence are a reason for unfitness.
2. Bipolar disorders or isolated manies in the anamnese are a reason for unfitness.
3. Depressive symptoms at the time of the anamnese ' s health inspection or depression that do not fall under the notion of bipolar disorder are generally a cause for inadequacy. A favourable specialist report is required for approval, which shows that there is no reasonable need to expect acute problems.
4. Gedrags-or personality disorders are generally a reason for unfitness.
5. Concentration or inprentation disorders are a reason for unfitness.
6. Cognitive impairment is a reason for unfitness.
7. Other psychiatric disorders that may have a negative impact on the boating: for approval, a favourable specialist report is required, showing that no acute problems can reasonably be expected.
Not good with insulin or oral antidiabetic agents Diabetes Mellitus or the occurrence of hypoglycaemia, is a reason for unfitness. In insulin-dependent Diabetes Mellitus, fitness in general is limited to a period of five years.
A favourable specialist report is required for approval, which shows that there is no reasonable need to expect acute problems.
A favourable specialist report is required for approval, which shows that there is no reasonable need to expect acute problems.
All chronic pulmonary disease with the potential for acute deterioration of pulmonary function which adversely affects physical condition such that it is no longer possible to meet the requirements of the general indications under Article 3 Five criteria laid down are grounds for unfitness.
1. Klepanomalies and congenital heart defects with haemodynamic consequences: a favourable specialist report is required for approval, which shows that there is no reasonable need for acute problems.
2. Ritme-or conduction disorders: for approval a favourable specialist report is required, showing that no acute problems can reasonably be expected.
3. The wearing of a pacemaker: for approval, a favourable specialist report is required, showing that no acute problems can reasonably be expected.
4. The wearing of an ICD is a reason for unfitness. Exceptions for the applicant for the small vessel to be used exclusively for the purposes of pleasure and pleasure are:
a. The period of ineligibility is two months after implantation. Approval (see point (c)) is possible after a favourable specialist report showing that the ICD did not issue electroshocks during this period, or do not have severe hemodynamic problems during ICD stimulation. occurred;
b. after the period mentioned under (a) is approved (see (c) possible after a favourable specialist report showing that the ICD has not issued electroshocks during this period, or that during stimulation of the ICD it is not serious haemodynamic problems have occurred and the apparatus cannot be affected by electromagnetic radiation,
The period of validity of the medical certificate for the exceptions described under (a) and (b) shall be 5 years.
5. Disorders of the myocardial system, resulting in such reduced stress of the heart that no longer can be satisfied with the criteria laid down in the general assessment instructions under Article 3 to 5, unfitness.
6. Angina pectoris: for approval, a favourable specialist report is required, showing that no acute problems are reasonably expected to be expected.
7. Hypertension: A repeated diastolic pressure of > 105 mm Hg is a reason for unfitness.
1. Upper extremities: the function of arms and hands must be sufficient for the operation of the rudder, the engine and the other equipment necessary for navigation and safe navigation. In the case of mutilation or amputation, a properly functioning prosthesis may be allowed, possibly while adjusting the abovementioned controls.
2. Lower extremities: in case of mutilation or amputation, a well functioning prosthesis is allowed.
3. In case of emergency, the applicant must be able to find his way through stairways and (flight) corridors without prosthesis and without the help of others.
4. By way of derogation from the first to third paragraphs, for the examination to obtain the small boating evidence used exclusively for the pleasure of pleasure, the extremities of the extremities may be used if the applicant is the vessel, where appropriate, with appropriate controls, may be safely controlled, in the opinion of the medical adviser.
The following shall apply to:
a. Length up to and including 25 metres in length:
1 ° loss of life of the legs is allowed if the applicant is able to go on and off board by means of his legs, possibly with a prosthesis or prostheses, and to operate the controls independently;
2 ° job loss of the legs is allowed if the applicant is seated in a wheelchair on its own and can go on board, and the fitting of a flight deck and other indoor work is such that a safe steering of the ship from the wheelchair is possible;
3 ° function loss of one of the arms is permitted if the applicant is able to control the control organs with the other arm.
b. Length of ships up to and including 6 metres, which:
function loss of the legs is allowed if the applicant is able to operate independently on board and on board and independently to operate the administrative organs.
(5) The fourth paragraph, subparagraph (a) (2) applies only to a specific custom vessel. The adjustments shall be made to the boatmasters ' certificate.
1. Chronic alcoholism, either constantly, or during certain periods in the last five years, is generally a reason for unfitness.
2. Addiction to narcotic, uplifting or other psychotropic substances in the anamnese in the last five years is generally a reason for unfitness.
1. Do you have a reduced eyesight of one or both eyes, even if you are using glasses or contact lenses?
2. Is your color for the colors red and green disturbed?
3. Do you have a reduced hearing, or do you use a hearing aid on either one or both ears?
4. Do you have cardiac arrhythmias, a pacemaker or an ICD?
5. Have you (had) an internal disease (see question 10 for diabetes) such as heart disease or vascular disease, high blood pressure, kidney disease or lung disease, or have you undergone heart or vascular surgery?
You may answer this question with NO if you have had an uncomplicated heart attack longer than 2 years ago where you have no complaints now or if your blood pressure has been well controlled for the last 6 months with medicines.
6. Have you (had) epilepsy, seizures, fainting, seizures of abnormal drowsiness, or other disorders of consciousness?
7. Have you (had) equilibrium disorders or dizzy disturbances?
8. Have you (had) a depression, psychosis, overstress, or any other psychiatric disorder?
9. Have you (had) a TIA, stroke, brain bleeding, or any other condition in the brain or to the nervous system?
10. Do you have diabetes?
11. Do you have a physical disability which restricts or is absent the normal use of an arm, hand, leg or foot?
12. Have you ever been investigated or have you been under treatment for the use of alcohol, drugs, sedatives or other mind-altering or intoxicating agents, or is there any problem currently being used?
13. Do you use medicines that can affect the ability to drive, such as: antidepressants, inducing agents, sleeping tablets, sedatives, pain killers and the like?
14. Do you have any other condition or physical disability that can affect safe sailing?
If one or more questions have been answered with YES you need to write to a doctor to explain the nature and severity of the condition, so that the medical adviser can assess whether you are in compliance with the requirements of the labelling.
You can do so with a doctor of choice. The cost of the doctor's visit is for your own account.
If you also have additional information that might be of interest in the rating, you can attach it separately.
Applicants for small boatmasters must comply with the requirements for the requirements of inland navigation. They do not need to be inspected, but they must be sufficient to make a declaration of their own. If one or more questions have been answered with YES, the medical adviser must assess whether the applicant complies with the requirements of the labelling, including on the basis of a doctor's explanatory statement. To make the assessment run without delay, set out the statement according to the instructions below.
You should only provide information in respect of the question to which the applicant has replied YES.
Instructions to the doctor for making a statement about the questions answered on the back with YES:
1. The corrected facial sharpness with each eye separately and both eyes simultaneously.
2. The nature of the colour disorder with, if possible, the gradation, for example, the test of HRR, TMC or an equivalent test.
3. The nature of the hearing impairment, with, if possible, the results of the tone audiometric examination for the frequencies 500, 1000, 2000 and 3000 Hz for each ear separately.
If one or more hearing aids are used, please indicate whether or not a conversation with each ear is clear (error-free) of each ear separately
4. The nature of arrhythmias, treatment, last time symptoms with/without medication, prognosis.
At the pacemaker and ICD, the timing of placement is important, the reason for placement, the presence of an escaperitme (pacemaker) and the final electroshock (ICD).
5. The nature of the condition, treatment, last time symptoms with/without medication, prognosis.
11. The cause of the condition, treatment, restrictions on the use of arm, hand, leg or foot. It is also important to give a description of the (on) possibilities of climbing on/off, on/off the board, operation of the engine and rudder, swimming.
12. The period during which the use of alcohol, drugs or sedatives has played or since when it is still playing, the duration, the possible treatment.
13. The drug, the dosage, the duration of use, and the degree to which (by) effects are experienced.
14. The nature of the condition, treatment, last time symptoms with/without medication, prognosis.
| Note on question ..... |
|
| Name stamp and doctor's signature |
a. of the French Republic:
-'Certificat génèral de capacité de catégorie A ', bearing the stamp stating that the certificate is valid on the waterways of zone 2, intended to be used in the Directive 82 /714/EEC ;
-'Certificats spéciaux de capacité ', bearing the stamp stating that the certificate is valid on the waterways of Zone 2, intended to be used in the Directive No 82 /714/EEC ;
b. of the Federal Republic of Germany:
-'Schifferpatent 'with additional validity for the' Seeschiffahrtstrassen ',
c. of the Kingdom of Belgium:
-'Skill-brevet A ',
-'provisional attestation in respect of the driving of an inland vessel ';
d. of the Republic of Finland:
-'Laivurinkirja/Skepparbrev ',
-'Kuljettajankirja I/Förarbrev I ',
e. of the Kingdom of Sweden:
-'Bevis om behörigde som skeppare B ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som skeppare A ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som styrman B ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som styrman A ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som sjöhijten ',
f. of the Republic of Hungary:
-Hajóskapitányi bizonyítvány (kapiteinsprove),
-Hajóvezetői 'A' bizonyítvány (shippersproof),
(in accordance with Decision No 15/2001. (IV. 27.) KöViM from the Minister for Transport and Water Resources concerning shipping vouchers);
g. of the Republic of Poland: Patent żeglarski kapitana żeglugi śródlądowej-kategorii A (Schippersproofing A) (according to the decision of the Minister of Infrastructure of 23 January 2003 on professional competence and the number of crew members Ship-board vessels).
h. of Romania: brevet de cãpitan fluvial categoria A (fairproof A) (in accordance with Decision No Minister for Public Works, Transport and Housing, approving the Regulation on the issue of national certificates of professional competence for staff on inland waterway transport M. Of., p. 984/04.7.2001 I, No 441/6.VIII.2001);
i. On the basis of the Revised Convention for the Navigation of the Rhine:
-large patent;
-small patent, as far as it is limited to large sailing licence.
a. of the French Republic:
-'Certificat général de capacité de catégorie A ', not stamped with the indication that the certificate is valid on the waterways of Zone 2 intended for the purpose of Directive No 82 /714/EEC ;
-'certificats spéciaux de capacité ', without the stamp stating that the certificate is valid on the waterways of Zone 2 intended to be used in the Directive 82 /714/EEC ;
b. of the Federal Republic of Germany:
-'Schifferpatent ';
c. of the Kingdom of Belgium:
-Vessel fat B;
d. of the Republic of Austria:
-'Kapitänspatent A '
-'Schiffsführerpatent A ',
e. of the Republic of Finland:
-'Laivurinkirja/Skepparbrev ',
-'Kuljettajankirja I/Förarbrev I ',
f. of the Kingdom of Sweden:
-'Bevis om behörigde som skeppare B ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som skeppare A ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som styrman B ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som styrman A ',
-'Bevis om behörigde som sjöhijten ',
g. of the Czech Republic: Průkaz způsobilosti kapitána a průkaz způsobilosti kormidelníka (Law of 25 May 1995 on Inland Navigation (114/1995 Sb.) and Decision of the Ministry of Transport of 14 September 1995 concerning the conditions under which persons are eligible for piloting and control of ships (224/1995 Sb.);
h. of the Republic of Estonia: Sisemultiaeva laevajuhi diplom;
i. of the Republic of Lithuania: Vidaus vandenu transporto specialisto laipsnio diplomas (approved by Decision No 161 of 15 May 2001 from the Minister for Transport and Communications concerning the rules for the issue of diplomas and certificates for experts in the field of inland waterway transport);
j. of the Republic of Hungary:
-Hajóskapitányi bizonyítvány (kapiteinsprove),
-Hajóvezetői bizonyítvány (shippersproof),
(in accordance with Decision No 15/2001. (IV. 27.) KöViM from the Minister of Transport and Water Resources in the case of shipping vouchers);
k. of the Republic of Poland: Patent żeglarski kapitana żeglugi śródlądowej-kategorii B (Schippersproof B) (according to the decision of the Minister of Infrastructure of 23 January 2003 on professional competence and the number of crew members Inland waterway vessels);
L. of the Slovak Republic:
-Lodný kapitán I. triedy,
-Lodný kapitán II. triedy,
(Decision 182/2001 Z. z. of the Ministry of Transport, Post and Telecommunications of the Slovak Republic laying down detailed rules on qualification requirements and on checking the professional competence of the members of a ship's crew and of skippers of vessels small ships (referring to Article 30 (7) and Article 31 (3) of Law 338/2000 Z. z. on inland navigation and amending certain laws);
m. of the Republic of Bulgaria:
-Свидетелство за правоспособност 'Капитан вътрешно плаване' (proof of professional competence for internal skippers),
-Свидетелство за правоспособност "Бурман вътрешно плаване" (proof of professional competence of deck officers in inland navigation) (Наредба No 6 от 25.7.2003 г. Министъра на транспорта и съобщенията за компетентност на морските лица в Република България, обн. ДВ, бр.83 от 2003 г. In accordance with Regulation No 6 of 25 July 2003 of the Minister for Transport and Communications on seafarers ' professional competence in the Republic of Bulgaria, DV nr. 83/2003);
n. of Romania: brevet de cãpitan fluvial categoria B (fairproof B) (in accordance with Decision No Minister for Public Works, Transport and Housing, approving the Regulation on the issue of national certificates of professional competence for staff on inland waterway transport M. Of., p. 984/04.7.2001 I, No 441/6.VIII.2001);
o. of the Republic of Croatia:
-Svjedodžba o stručnoj osposobljenosti/Befähigungszeugnis
Zapovjednik-vrsta A/Schiffsführer-Class A
(proof of professional ability-type A);
-Svjedodžba o stručnoj osposobljenosti/Befähigungszeugnis
Zapovjednik-vrsta B/Schiffsführer-Class B
(proof of professional competence-type B type)
(in accordance with the Decree on professional titles and qualifications of skippers, Official Gazette No. 73/09).
a. of the Kingdom of Belgium:
-'brevet yachtman ',
-'brevet yachtnavigator ',
-'general steering wheel fat ';
b. of the Federal Republic of Germany: 'Sportbootführerschein-See',
c. of the Kingdom of Denmark:
-'duelighedsprove i sejlads for fritidssejlere ',
-'duelighedsbevis i sejlads for fritidssejlere ',
d. of the United Kingdom:
-'certificate of competence as yachtmaster offshore ',
-'certificate of competence as coastal skipper ';
-'international certificate of competence ', issued by the Royal Yachting Association;
e. sports patent issued under the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation.
a. of the Kingdom of Belgium:
-'restricted flight control fat ';
b. of the Federal Republic of Germany:
-'Sportbootführerschein-Within ';
-"Sportschifferzeugnis."
1.1 For the large boatmasters ' certificate and limited sailing certificate on all inland waterways:
-the Section 1.1 of Annex 7.1 said certificates of proficiency;
-the pilot/skipper, master and bootman diploma as recorded in the Central Register of Vocational training with codes 10650, 10651, 10653, 25510, 25511, 25512, 93110, 93030, 95630 and 95640;
-the large patent, for the purpose of Article 6.04, first paragraph, part a, of the Rsp .
1.2 For the great sailing license and limited sailing license on rivers, canals and lakes:
-the Section 1.2 of Annex 7.1 said certificates of proficiency;
-the large patent referred to in Article 6.04, first paragraph, part a, of the Rsp ;
-under Article 9.02, first paragraph, of the Rsp valid Rhine fender and large patent.
1.3 For the small boat test on all inland waterways:
-the evidence referred to in 1.1 above,
-the 'brevet yachtman' and 'brevet yachtnavigator' issued by the Kingdom of Belgium;
-the 'Sportbootführerschein-See' issued by the Federal Republic of Germany;
-the proficiency certificate issued by the Member State after 31 December 2012 for the driving of a small aircraft vessel on all inland waterways;
-the proficiency certificate issued by the National Police Office between 31 March 1994 and 1 January 2013 for the driving of a small aircraft vessel on all inland waterways;
-the police certificate of proficiency issued by the State Police between 1 November 1984 and 1 April 1994 for the driving of a small police vessel on all inland waterways;
-the certificate of competency certificate issued by the Rijkpolicing Corps, pursuant to Part IV of the Decision on Safety Standards and Regulations for National Vessels 1976, for the control of a small vessel in all waters;
-the Military Proficiency Certificate issued by the Genie Training Centre, for the period from 1 January 1996 to 15 July 2009, for navigation on all inland waterways;
-the Military Proficiency School in Den Helder, in the period from 1 January 2014 to 1 January 2019, shall provide military boatmasters ' certificates for navigation on all inland waterways;
-the diplomas and certificates referred to in Parts 1 to 6 of Table 3 of this Annex, together with the small craft certificate I or the certificate to obtain that certificate,
-the diploma's first and second mate for the major trading vessel or the knowledge proof Higher/Medium Maritime Officer, referred to in Parts 1 and 3 of Table 3 of this Annex, together with the certificate of the central training Of adspirant plum;
-the diplomas and certificates referred to in Parts 1 and 3 of Table 3 of this Annex, together with the NAUTOP 3 diploma from the training course of the Ministry of Infrastructure and the Environment,
-the diploma of prospective skipper of the CBR, in combination with:
a. The diploma restricted examination small boatmasters ' certificate, type VBD and VBA, of the Vamex Foundation;
b. A 150-day sailing time of 150 days and a diploma of VBA, of the Vamex Foundation;
c. A 150-day sailing time of a service booklet and the CVT navigation 2 sub-certificate 2
d. The diploma restricted examination small craft certificate (VBD) of the Vamex Foundation and the Sub-certificate navigation 2 of the CCV.
1.4 For small boat test on rivers, canals and lakes:
-the evidence referred to in point 1.2,
-the in Sections 1.1 and 1.2 of Annex 7.1 said certificates of proficiency;
-the 'Sportbootführerschein-Inside' and 'Sportschifferzeugnis' issued by the Federal Republic of Germany;
-the sports patent referred to in Article 6.04, first paragraph, part c, of the Rsp ;
-under Article 9.02, first paragraph, of the Rsp valid sports patent;
-the proficiency certificate issued by the National Unit after 31 December 2012 for the driving of a small police vessel on rivers, canals and lakes;
-the proficiency certificate issued by the National Police Office between 31 March 1994 and 1 January 2013 for the driving of a small police vessel on rivers, canals and lakes;
-the proficiency certificate issued by the State Police Force between 1 November 1984 and 1 April 1994 for the driving of a small police vessel on rivers, canals and lakes;
-the Military Proficiency Certificate issued by the Genie Training Centre in the period from 1 January 1996 to 15 July 2009, for the navigation of canals, rivers and lakes;
-the Military Proficiency School in Den Helder, in the period from 1 January 2014 to 1 January 2019, shall provide military boatmasters ' certificates for navigation on canals, rivers and lakes;
-the diploma of prospective skipper of the CBR, in combination with:
a. The diploma restricted examination small boatproof, type VBD; or
b. A 150-day sailing time which is demonstrable by means of a service booklet.
Diploma
Regulations 1
Regulations 2
Navigation 1
Navigation 2
Knowledge-based water
Loading and unloading
Engine knowledge
Ship knowledge
Safety and the environment
| Secondary vocational training of RenB (WVO) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Intermediate vocational training in Baggerbedrijf (WVO) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Sailor (WCBO) |
1 # |
V |
|||||||
| Boothusband (WCBO) |
1 # |
V |
|||||||
| Sailor (WEB) |
1 # |
V |
V |
||||||
| SchippersDiploma RKM before 1 April 1984 (KOFS) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| SchippersDiploma Wide waters before 1 April 1984 (KOFS) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Skipper RKM (KOFS) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Advance (KOFS) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Skipper Sailing (KOFS) |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| Molenboss or Zuigerboss (KOFS) |
1 # |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Engine floor/driver (KOFS) |
V |
||||||||
| Skipper Rhine before 1 July 2001 |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||||
| Skipper Rhine after 1 July 2001 |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
| MAROF |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Steering man KHV, GHV and sea sea shipping |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| SMBW |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Hellemate/mechanical Small Ships |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| SW V, SW VI |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Starman GZV |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| KZV Steering Man |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Large vessel B or equivalent proof of proficiency in one of the Member States of the State or of Belgium or by the CCR as recognised as equivalent to the certificate of proficiency. |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| CWO large motor ship |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
||
| MBO of marine engineering |
V |
||||||||
| Maritime Waterbuilder and BOL Baggeraar/Steering |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
V |
|||
| Certificate of practical examination sailing time as intended Art. 7.19a, part a , from the inland waterway system |
V |
Diplomas and training
Exemption examination components
| (1) The following diplomas provided for by the Law on Marine diplomas, the Law on marine diplomas, 1935, or Seafarers Law : First mate for the major commercial operation; Second mate for the major commercial operation; third mate for the major commercial operation; Steering man for small commercial shipping; Steering man for limited small commercial shipping; Driving force mate for the main towing operation; Driving force for coastal towing operation; sea-seagoing control man; marine marine SW VI; sea transport SW V; seagoing sea shipping S IV (v); sea transport W IV (v). |
In order to obtain small boatmasters II: A1 to A3 and B to F |
| 2. A statement issued by the Commission for the driving tests for seagoing or sea-sea shipping tests to obtain a diploma referred to in (1). |
|
| (3) The following diplomas or certificates of a school, as referred to in Article 3 (2), Article 14, 1st paragraph, of the Law on Secondary Education : School diploma or certificate BS; School diploma HTS, Department of Navigation; School diploma (S IV) for small commercial shipping; School diploma SW VI for sea shipping; School diploma SW V for sea shipping; School diploma, S IV, for sea shipping; School diploma W IV for sea shipping; Knowledge-proof Steering man large and small sailing vessel; Knowledge evidence Higher/Medium Maritime Officer; Demonstration pilot/engineer small ships; Watchman knowledge proof; Bag-bag/pilot knowledge proof; Flight crew knowledge evidence up to 3000 GT; knowledge master/driver limited workspace. |
|
| 4. Officer (operational service) of the nautical service, lieutenant at sea (sea service) or reserve officer for special services (sea service) of the Royal Navy. |
|
| 5. One of the following diplomas or certificates for maritime navigation issued before 11 December 1982: Certificate Navigator ZeeSailing, issued by the Klop Institute; Certificate theoretical coastal navigation and advanced navigation certificate, issued by the Stichting zeesail School 'Noorderhaaks' at Den Helder; Diploma B (short sea shipping), issued by the Royal Dutch Motorboat Club. |
|
| 6. The Certificate Theoretical Coast Navigation, issued by the Royal Dutch Water Sports Association. |
|
| (7) One of the following diplomas or certificates: School diploma or certificate inland waterway education (LBO or MBO); School diploma or certificate of dredging (LBO or MBO); Seaman's diploma (apprenticeship system in the Rhine and inland waterways); Diploma in the case of bakers/decker (apprenticeship); a diploma or a certificate of molenboss for the dredging company; a diploma or certificate in the master of the dredging company; graduated Seaman (WEB); Diploma Bootsman (WEB); Diploma in baking skipper/decker (WEB). |
In order to obtain small boatmasters I: A1 to A3 and B to F; to obtain small boatmasters II: A1 to A3 and B to D and F |
(85 mm × 54 mm background blue)
(rear)
(85 mm × 54 mm background blue)
(rear)
(85 mm x 54 mm background blue)
| NL INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT |
||
| SMALL VESSEL I/II |
||
| Passport photo 6 |
1. |
|
| 2. |
5. |
|
| 3. |
||
| 4. |
8. |
|
| 9. |
||
| Signature 7 |
10. |
11. |
| 12. |
13. |
|
| 14. |
||
| INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT (resolution 40 Of The UN/ECE Working Party On Inland Water Transport) |
CERTIFICATE INTERNATIONAL DE CONDUCTEUR DE BATEAU DE PLA ' SANCE (Résolution No. 40 de groupe de travail CEE-ONU des transports par voie navigable) |
|
| 1. SURNAME |
SURNAME |
NOM |
| 2. FORENAMES |
FIRST NAMES |
PRÉNOMS |
| 3. DATE OF BIRTH AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE ET LIEU DE NAISSANCE |
| 4. NATIONALITY |
NATIONALITY |
NATIONAL ENTRY |
| 5. CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DE SERVICE CITOYEN |
| 6. PASSPORT PHOTO OF THE HOLDER |
HOLDER OF HOLDER |
PHOTO THE DÉTENTEUR |
| 7. SIGNATURE OF THE HOLDER |
SIGNATURE OF HOLDER |
SIGNATURE DU TITULAR |
| 8. VESSEL NUMBER NUMBER |
CERTIFICATE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DU CERTIFICAT |
| 9. VALID FOR |
FOR VALID FOR |
VALABLE POUR |
| 10. ISSUE DATE |
DATE OR ISSUE |
DATE D' ÉMISSION |
| 11. EXPIRY |
DATE OF EXPIRY |
DATE D' EXPIRATION |
| 12. ADOPTED BY |
ISSUED BY |
DÉLIVRÉ PAR |
| 13. DESIGNATED BY |
AUTHORISED BY |
AUTORISÉ PAR |
| 14. RESTRICKINS/ENTRIES |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
| FOUNDATION VAMEX + 31 (88) 4564567 WWW.VAMEX.EN info@vamex.nl |
||
(85 mm × 54 mm background blue)
(rear)
(85 mm x 54 mm background blue)
| NL INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT |
||
| GREAT PLEASURE PROOF I/II |
||
| Passport photo 6 |
1. |
|
| 2. |
5. |
|
| 3. |
||
| 4. |
8. |
|
| 9. |
||
| Signature 7 |
10. |
11. |
| 12. |
13. |
|
| 14. |
||
| INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT (resolution 40 Of The UN/ECE Working Party On Inland Water Transport) |
CERTIFICATE INTERNATIONAL DE CONDUCTEUR DE BATEAU DE PLA ' SANCE (Résolution No. 40 de groupe de travail CEE-ONU des transports par voie navigable) |
|
| 1. SURNAME |
SURNAME |
NOM |
| 2. FORENAMES |
FIRST NAMES |
PRÉNOMS |
| 3. DATE OF BIRTH AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE ET LIEU DE NAISSANCE |
| 4. NATIONALITY |
NATIONALITY |
NATIONAL ENTRY |
| 5. CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DE SERVICE CITOYEN |
| 6. PASSPORT PHOTO OF THE HOLDER |
HOLDER OF HOLDER |
PHOTO THE DÉTENTEUR |
| 7. SIGNATURE OF THE HOLDER |
SIGNATURE OF HOLDER |
SIGNATURE DU TITULAR |
| 8. VESSEL NUMBER NUMBER |
CERTIFICATE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DU CERTIFICAT |
| 9. VALID FOR |
FOR VALID FOR |
VALABLE POUR |
| 10. ISSUE DATE |
DATE OR ISSUE |
DATE D' ÉMISSION |
| 11. EXPIRY |
DATE OF EXPIRY |
DATE D' EXPIRATION |
| 12. ADOPTED BY |
ISSUED BY |
DÉLIVRÉ PAR |
| 13. DESIGNATED BY |
AUTHORISED BY |
AUTORISÉ PAR |
| 14. RESTRICKINS/ENTRIES |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
| FOUNDATION VAMEX + 31 (88) 4564567 WWW.VAMEX.EN info@vamex.nl |
||
(85 mm × 54 mm background blue)
(rear)
(85 mm x 54 mm background blue)
| NL INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT |
||
| Passport photo 6 |
1. |
|
| 2. |
5. |
|
| 3. |
||
| 4. |
8. |
|
| 9. |
||
| Signature 7 |
10. |
11. |
| 12. |
13. |
|
| 14. |
||
| INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE FOR OPERATORS OF PLEASURE CRAFT (resolution 40 Of The UN/ECE Working Party On Inland Water Transport) |
CERTIFICATE INTERNATIONAL DE CONDUCTEUR DE BATEAU DE PLA ' SANCE (Résolution No. 40 de groupe de travail CEE-ONU des transports par voie navigable) |
|
| 1. SURNAME |
SURNAME |
NOM |
| 2. FORENAMES |
FIRST NAMES |
PRÉNOMS |
| 3. DATE OF BIRTH AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE AND PLACE OF BIRTH |
DATE ET LIEU DE NAISSANCE |
| 4. NATIONALITY |
NATIONALITY |
NATIONAL ENTRY |
| 5. CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
CITIZEN SERVICE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DE SERVICE CITOYEN |
| 6. PASSPORT PHOTO OF THE HOLDER |
HOLDER OF HOLDER |
PHOTO THE DÉTENTEUR |
| 7. SIGNATURE OF THE HOLDER |
SIGNATURE OF HOLDER |
SIGNATURE DU TITULAR |
| 8. VESSEL NUMBER NUMBER |
CERTIFICATE NUMBER |
NUMÉRO DU CERTIFICAT |
| 9. VALID FOR |
FOR VALID FOR |
VALABLE POUR |
| 10. ISSUE DATE |
DATE OR ISSUE |
DATE D' ÉMISSION |
| 11. EXPIRY |
DATE OF EXPIRY |
DATE D' EXPIRATION |
| 12. ADOPTED BY |
ISSUED BY |
DÉLIVRÉ PAR |
| 13. DESIGNATED BY |
AUTHORISED BY |
AUTORISÉ PAR |
| 14. RESTRICKINS/ENTRIES |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
RESTRICTIONS/MENTIONS |
| FOUNDATION VAMEX + 31 (88) 4564567 WWW.VAMEX.EN info@vamex.nl |
||
Article Bw
Rhine, Waal, and Lek
Jo. Articles Bw , Bvb , Bvr, Rosin , Rsp
Other waters
Jo. Articles Bw , Bvb , Bvr, Rosin , Rsp
Violation Description
Penalty amount
Fact code
| Chapter 2 Bvw: Access to the market | |||||
| 5 (1) |
2 Bvb |
2 Bvb |
Carry out commercial transport of goods or persons without the ship being provided with a valid document of admission. |
€ 500,- |
BVW 2.0.001 |
| 6 paragraph 1 |
2.2 Bvr |
2.2 Bvr |
The undertaking engaged in commercial freight transport, other than for the purpose of, or coming from, the undertaking, is not a person to whom a certificate of professional competence has been issued. |
€ 1,250,- |
BVW 2.0.005 |
| 6 paragraph 1 |
The skilled person affiliated to the undertaking is not effectively and continuing to lead the transport activity of that undertaking. |
€ 1,250,- |
BVW 2.0.006 |
||
| 6 paragraph 6 |
An undertaking shall act in breach of the rules relating to professional competence linked to the exemption or exemption. |
€ 1,250,- |
BVW 2.0.007 |
||
| Chapter 3 Section 1 Bvw: Certificate of Research | |||||
| 7 (1) |
7 paragraph 2 Bvw jo. 6 Bvb |
7 paragraph 2 Bvw jo. 6 Bvb |
Use a vessel designated by category without the required certificate of enquiry. |
€ 1,250,- (2) |
BVW 3.1.001 |
| 8 (3) |
Use an inland waterway vessel in violation of the applicable technical requirements. |
Max. € 5,000,- 1, 2) |
BVW 3.1.003 |
||
| 10 (2) |
Use an inland waterway vessel in violation of the requirements set out in the certificate of investigation. |
Max. € 5,000,- 1, 2) |
BVW 3.1.025 |
||
| 11 |
Use an inland waterway vessel as owner or commander without the Minister or the competent authority having been informed without delay of significant damage and recovery or alteration and other major changes or transfers of ownership. |
€ 500,- (2) |
BVW 3.1.027 |
||
| 12 |
Use an inland waterway vessel whose condition, use and equipment is not in accordance with what is specified in the required valid certificate of investigation. |
Max. € 5,000,- 1, 2) |
BVW 3.1.029 |
||
| 13 (4) |
An inland waterway vessel shall be in breach of the rules which are linked to an exemption or a derogation in respect of the technical State. |
Max. $5,000,- 1, 2) |
BVW 3.1.031 |
||
| Chapter 3 Section 2 Bvw: Ship measurement | |||||
| 21 (1) |
4.16 Bvr |
4.16 Bvr |
Use a ship without a valid measurement letter. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.2.001 |
| Chapter 3 paragraph 3: Crew | |||||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.10 Paragraph 2 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.4 paragraph 1 Bvr. 3.10 Paragraph 2 Rsp |
As an employer or commander in the operating mode A1, extend the sailing time more than once a week until 16 hours. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.001 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7. Bvr jo. 3.12 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.5 Bvr jo. 3.12 Rsp |
As an employer or a commander, the rest period prescribed for the crew shall not be taken into account in the event of a change of operation. |
€ 300,-for each hour more than 1 hour rest (2) |
BVW 3.3.033 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.12 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.5 Bvr jo. 3.12 Rsp |
As an employer or a commander, an operating mode of operation while not being on board the required level of reinforcement. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.093 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.15 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8. and 5.6. paragraph 1 Bvr. 3.15 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
If the employer or the commander fails to continuously have the minimum crew on board during the voyage according to the prescribed table minimum crew of motor ships and pusher craft: |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.097 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.098 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.099 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.100 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.101 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.16 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.1 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to keep on board the minimum crew during the course of the voyage, the minimum crew shall be kept on board: |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.113 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.114 |
|||
| For each driver or Seaman engine driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.115 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.116 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.117 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.118 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.17 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.2 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to keep on board vessels for day trips during the course of the voyage, the minimum crew shall be kept on board all the time. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.135 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.136 |
|||
| For each driver or Seaman engine driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.137 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.138 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.139 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.140 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.17 (2) Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.3 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to constantly have the minimum crew on board on steamships for day trips during the course of the voyage. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.159 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.160 |
|||
| For each driver or Seaman engine driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.161 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.162 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.163 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.164 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.17 paragraph 3 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.4 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to keep on board the minimum crew on board during the course of the voyage, the minimum crew shall be kept on board. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.183 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.184 |
|||
| For each driver or Seaman engine driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.185 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.186 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.187 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.188 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
n/a see definition ferries |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.5 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to continuously carry the minimum crew on ferries during the course of the voyage. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.203 |
|||
| For each control man deficit |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.204 |
|||
| For each initial driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.205 |
|||
| For every second driver shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.206 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.207 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.208 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
4) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.6 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to keep on board the minimum crew during the course of the voyage, the minimum crew shall be kept on board. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.223 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.224 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.225 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
4) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.7 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to constantly have the minimum crew on board for tugs or tugs carrying out port services during the course of the operation. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.229 |
|||
| For each sailor's engine floorboard shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.230 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.231 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
4) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.6 paragraph 4 Bvr jo. Annex 5.8 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to keep on board the minimum crew on a fast ferry during operation, the minimum crew shall be kept on board. |
||
| For each skipper shortage |
€ 5,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.251 |
|||
| For each sailor's engine floorboard shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.252 |
|||
| For each full-rose deficit |
€ 3,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.253 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.254 |
|||
| For each light-sailor shortage |
€ 2,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.255 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr jo 1.7 Bvr jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.18 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.8 and 5.7 Bvr jo. 3.18 Rsp |
If the employer or the commander fails to comply with the required increase of the minimum crew. |
||
| For each sailor's engine floorboard shortage |
€ 4,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.282 |
|||
| For each sailor shortage |
€ 3,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.283 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02. Member 1 Rsp jo. 3.15, 3.16, 3.17 |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.6 Bvr |
If the employer or the commander fails to ensure that the crew member/member has the requisite competence. |
Max. € 1,400,- 2, 3) |
BVW 3.3.293 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 paragraph 2 Rsp |
n/a |
As an employer or a commander a pregnant woman, or a maternity ward, to have the minimum crew be made up to at least 14 weeks of which at least 6 weeks before and 7 weeks after giving birth. |
€ 200,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.301 |
| 22 (9) |
n/a |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.9 Bvr |
As an employer, or a commander, a woman who, under contract of employment or public contract, is part of the minimum crew for 14 weeks around the presumed date of confinement. |
€ 200,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.302 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 2.02 Paragraph 1 Rsp Jo. 3.20 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 5.10 Bvr jo. 3.20 Rsp |
As an employer or commander, a seagoing vessel shall operate on inland waterways without any of the following: |
||
| That there is a person on board who is in possession of a large boatmasters ' certificate. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.303 |
|||
| That after a period of 24 hours a period of up to 14 hours, the holder of the large vessel has been replaced by another person in possession of a large boatpiece certificate. |
€ 1,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.304 |
|||
| That the prescribed minimum crew is on board as per operating mode. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.305 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 22 paragraph 5 Bvw jo. 3.23 Rsp |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 22 (5) Bvw |
If the employer or the commander fails to comply with the rules or restrictions laid down in the exemption. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.314 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 8 of the Bvw jo. 22 paragraph 5 Bvw jo. 3.23 Rsp |
22 paragraph 8 of the Bvw jo. 22 (5) Bvw |
If a crew member fails to comply with the rules or restrictions laid down in the waiver. |
€ 250 |
BVW 3.3.315 |
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the commander does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member who performs work in operating mode A1 has an uninterrupted rest period of at least 8 hours in a contiguous 24-hour time period from the end of each uninterrupted rest period of at least 8 hours outside the course of operation. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.321 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.322 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 450,- |
BVW 3.3.323 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.324 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.325 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the employer does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member who carries out work by operating mode A1 has an uninterrupted rest period of at least 8 hours in a continuous period of 24 hours from the end of each uninterrupted rest period of at least 8 hours outside the course of operation. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.326 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.327 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 900,- |
BVW 3.3.328 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 1,200,- |
BVW 3.3.329 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.330 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 (2) Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the commander does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member carrying out work by operating mode A2 has a rest period of at least 8 hours of which at least 6 hours are uninterrupted for 24 hours in an attached time space from the end of each continuous rest period of at least 6 hours outside the course of operation. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.331 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.332 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 450,- |
BVW 3.3.333 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.334 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.335 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 (2) Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the employer does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member who carries out work by operating mode A2 has a rest period of at least 8 hours of which at least 6 hours of continuous time in an attached time space of 24 hours shall be counted from The end of each continuous rest period of at least 6 hours outside the course of the course of work. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.336 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.337 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 900,- |
BVW 3.3.338 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 1,200,- |
BVW 3.3.339 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.340 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 paragraph 3 Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the commander does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member who carries out work by operating mode B has a rest period of at least 24 hours, at least 6 hours of which at least 6 hours of continuous, in a continuous 48-hour time period to be counted from the start of a rest period of 6 hours. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.341 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.342 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 450,- |
BVW 3.3.343 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.344 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 150,- |
BVW 3.3.345 |
|||
| 22 (9) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.11 paragraph 3 Rsp |
n/a basis for rest periods Atw |
If the employer does not organise the work in such a way that a crew member who carries out work under way of operating B has a rest period of at least 24 hours, at least 6 hours of continuous operation, in a continuous period of 48 hours, count of the start of a rest period of 6 hours. |
||
| In the case of a 1-to 2-hour deficit: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.346 |
|||
| In the case of a 2 to 3 hour deficit: |
€ 600,- |
BVW 3.3.347 |
|||
| In the case of a deficiency of 3 to 4 hours: |
€ 900,- |
BVW 3.3.348 |
|||
| In the case of a 4-to 5-hour deficit: |
€ 1,200,- |
BVW 3.3.349 |
|||
| If you have a longer duration of less than 5 hours, for each hour: |
€ 300,- |
BVW 3.3.350 |
|||
| 23 (1) |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 28 Bvb |
22 paragraph 7 Bvw jo. 28 Bvb |
When an employer or a commander is in possession of an internal vessel without having a crew member, not skipper, with a valid medical certificate: |
||
| Every year from reaching the age of 65: |
€ 500,- (2) |
BVW 3.3.351 |
|||
| Chapter 3 Section 4: Skill certificate | |||||
| 25 (4) |
14 Bvb |
14 Bvb |
Use a ship for which a large vessel is required without a valid large boatmasters ' certificate or equivalent document referred to in Article 25 (3) of the Bvw issued to the commander. |
€ 1,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.001 |
| 25 (4) |
15 Bvb |
15 Bvb |
Use a vessel for which a limited size certificate is required without a valid large boatmasters ' certificate or equivalent document or equivalent document referred to in Article 25 (3) of the Bvw, issued. |
€ 1,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.003 |
| 25 (5) |
As a commander, conduct or conduct an internal vessel while the ship's certificate has been declared invalid or has been denied to the pilot-in-command, or has been denied the boatmasters ' certificate. |
€ 1,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.005 |
||
| 28 (7) |
The employer or the commander shall act contrary to the requirements of the certificate following the examination of physical and mental fitness. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.011 |
||
| 31 (4) |
Act contrary to the rules/restrictions laid down in Article 31 (1) and (2) respectively of a waiver of the boatproof licence. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.013 |
||
| 33 (2) |
n/a |
Jo. 7.1. Bvr i.v.m. 34 Bvw jo. 13 Bvb |
Act contrary to the rules laid down by ministerial rules on sailing licences for the Westerschelde, the Oosterschelde, the Wadden Sea, the Eems, the Dollard, the IJsselmeer, the IJmeer or the markerlake, with the exception of the Gouwzee as referred to in Article 13 (3) of the BVB jo. Article 7.1 of the BVR. |
€ 1,500,- (2) |
BVW 3.4.015 |
| Chapter 4 Paragraph 1: Ship number | |||||
| 36 (4) |
36 (2) (a) (a) |
36 (2) (a) (a) |
As the owner of an IWC vessel, not within two weeks of the assignment and notification of the vessel number, affixing this number to the IWC vessel. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.1.001 |
| 36 (4) |
36 (2) (b) (b) |
36 (2) (b) (b) |
If the owner of an IWC vessel does not notify the Minister of any change in circumstances of an inland waterway vessel within two weeks, giving rise to a change in the number of the vessel. |
€ 1,250,- |
BVW 4.1.002 |
| 36 (4) |
30 (2) Bvb (jo). 9.1 Bvr |
30 (2) Bvb (jo). 9.1 Bvr |
As the owner of an IWC vessel, the registration number shall not be affixed to the internal vessel within 2 weeks in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.1. Bvr |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.1.003 |
| Chapter 4 Section 2: Data provision | |||||
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.05 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 2.11 Bvr |
A crew member shall not be able to demonstrate his ability to board a ship by a document legally recognised for that purpose. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.2.003 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Member 1 Bvr jo. 3.13 Rsp Jo. Annex A1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.3 paragraph 2 of the Bvr jo. 3.13 Rsp Jo. Annex A1 Rsp |
As commander in the 48-hour period prior to entering the inland waterways, the rest periods of each crew member and the vessel's sailing times shall not be recorded in accordance with the rules laid down by law. |
€ 800,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.007 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7. Bvr jo. 3.10 Paragraph 2 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.4 paragraph 1 Bvr. 3.10 Paragraph 2 Rsp |
Using a ship during the weekly extension of the sailing time to a maximum of 16 hours in the operating mode A1, without this extension can be demonstrated with the registrations of a well-functioning tachograph of a type that has been approved in accordance with Annex A3 to the Rsp by the competent authority of a State State or of Belgium and fulfilling the requirements set out in Annex A3. |
€ 800,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.008 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.10 Paragraph 3 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.4 paragraph 1 Bvr. 3.10 Paragraph 3 Rsp |
Use a ship between 10 p.m. and 06.00 hours, block time A1, between 23.00 and 05.00, block time A2, without recording the sailing time by means of a tachograph issued by the competent authority of the vessel. a State of the State or Belgium has been approved and authorised and is in conformity with the requirements of Annex A3 to the Rsp and is functioning properly. |
€ 800,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.009 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Member 1 Bvr jo. 3.13 Paragraph 5 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.14 Paragraph 2 of the Bvr |
As a commander, the registrations of the tachograph shall not be retained on board for at least six months after the last entry in the chronological order. |
€ 270,- |
BVW 4.2.010 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.12 paragraph 7 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.4 paragraph 1 Bvr. 3.12 paragraph 7 Rsp |
To use a ship without any change in operation the rest period of 8 or 6 hours may be demonstrated by a declaration as referred to in Annex A4 of the Rsp or with a copy of the page containing notes of the vessel. the rest period of the ship, on which the last voyage of the crew member took place. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.011 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.06 (4) (a) (a) |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.11 Bvr jo. 3.06 (4) (a) (a) |
If the holder does not hand over the personal service book to the skipper at the first appointment. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.2.012 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.06 (4) (b) (b) |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.11 Bvr jo. 3.06 (4) (b) (b) |
In the event that the holder does not submit, within a period of 12 months, the personal service booklet to and not to be stamped by a local competent authority. |
€ 125,- |
BVW 4.2.013 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.06 (6) (a) (a) |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.11 Bvr jo. 3.06 (6) (a) (a) |
As commander, do not fill in the duty book regularly. |
€ 125,- |
BVW 4.2.014 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.06 (6) (b) (b) |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.11 Bvr jo. 3.06 (6) (b) (b) |
As a commander, do not keep the service book in the wheelhouse. |
€ 60,- |
BVW 4.2.015 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.06 (6) (c) (c) |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.11 Bvr jo. 3.06 (6) (c) (c) |
As commander, do not return the diensbooklet to the holder immediately upon request. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.2.016 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
As commander, have the sailing time book on board at any location other than the flight deck. |
€ 1,000,- |
BVW 4.2.019 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
When using a ship as commander while no vessel is on board or use a ship for which no vessel has been issued. |
€ 5,000,- |
BVW 4.2.020 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
As pilot-in-command, the operating mode has not been recorded on every page of the fishing time book. |
€ 100,- |
BVW 4.2.021 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
As commander-in-command as soon as the operation begins or continues, the data from column 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the vessel book shall not be recorded: |
||
| For each day not filled: |
€ 270,- |
BVW 4.2.022 |
|||
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
If the pilot-in-command is interrupted or terminated, the data from column 1, 5, 6 and 7 in the vessel book shall not be recorded: |
||
| For each day not filled: |
€ 270,- |
BVW 4.2.026 |
|||
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
In the case of a pilot in the crew of the crew for the first time, and in the event of a change in the composition of the crew, column 8 of the vessel's time book has not been completed. |
€ 200,- |
BVW 4.2.030 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
As commander for 08.00 the following morning, the following morning's rest periods in column 9 to 11 of the vessel log book have not been completed. 5) |
||
| For each day not filled: |
€ 270,- |
BVW 4.2.031 |
|||
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
In the case of rotation of the crew, the pilot-in-command shall not specify the time and time of the vessel in column 12 and 13 of the vessel book. |
€ 100,- |
BVW 4.2.035 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 1 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 member1 Rsp |
As a pilot-in-command, after changing operations, have not taken the necessary notes on a new page. |
€ 50,- |
BVW 4.2.036 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr Jo. 1.7 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 3 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 Paragraph 3 Rsp |
Use an inland waterway vessel without having been retained on board for six months after the last entry in the document which has not been declared invalid. |
€ 540,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.055 |
| 37 (2) |
31 Bvb Jo. 1.9 Bvr jo 3.13 paragraph 6 Rsp |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.12 Bvr jo 3.13 paragraph 6 Rsp |
An inland waterway vessel shall, without any new crew member at the time of repayment or reinforcement of crew, use a certificate as referred to in Annex A4 of the Rsp or a copy of the page containing the notations of the vessel's minimum rest periods. the vessel's sailing time book on which the last voyage of the crew member took place. |
€ 1,000,- (2) |
BVW 4.2.057 |
| 37 (2) |
n/a national rules |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.13 Member 2 Bvr |
If a pilot-in-command on a ferry, ferry, or tour boat has not carried out any care that a ship's journey log is present on board or at the premises of the ship, it shall be present. |
€ 450,- |
BVW 4.2.059 |
| 37 (2) |
n/a national rules |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.13 Member 2 Bvr |
As commander, the ship's name shall not be entered in the ship's journal. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.2.060 |
| 37 (2) |
n/a national rules |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.13 Member 2 Bvr |
If the commander does not indicate the beginning and the end of the ferry service or sailing vessel in the ship's journey log. |
||
| Per day not filled |
€ 270,- |
BVW 4.2.061 |
|||
| 37 (2) |
n/a national rules |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.13 Member 2 Bvr |
Do not indicate in the ship's journal the mark of test or the official vessel number. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 4.2.065 |
| 37 (2) |
n/a national rules |
31 Bvb Jo. 5.13 Member 2 Bvr |
As commander, indicate not the members of the crew at the beginning of the daily ferry or sailing trip with the name and function in the ship's journey log. |
€ 200,- |
BVW 4.2.066 |
| Chapter 5 (1) Bvw: Maintaining | |||||
| 43 (2) |
2.7 Bvr |
2.7 Bvr |
In the absence of a concern to ensure that the movement of goods can be checked by the owner or operator of the IWC vessel, or on the basis of the data from the commercial register. |
€ 625,- |
BVW 5.1.001 |
| 43 (2) |
1.9 Bvr Jo. 3.13 Paragraph 4 Rsp |
5.12 Bvr jo. 3.13 Paragraph 4 Rsp |
To use an inland waterway vessel without the declaration of issuing a certificate of issue on board or on request to be displayed on request. |
€ 150,- (2) |
BVW 5.1.002 |
| 43 (2) |
Mandatory to have Navigation on the Rhine-Statement on board o.b. Rpr |
8.4 Bvr Jo. 8.5. BFri |
The holder of the document of admission shall not ensure that this document can be verified on board the barge for which the document has been issued or at the premises of the owner or operator of that IWC vessel. |
€ 150,- |
BVW 5.1.006 |
| 46 (2) |
If the holder does not give a proper inspection of the document required by or pursuant to the Internal Act, on the basis of the first claim. |
€ 90,-per document |
BVW 5.1.010 |
||
(1) These penalty codes are based on infringements of the technical rules on which the certificate of investigation can be issued or issued. The amount of the penalty is the maximum amount to be imposed. Depending on the facts and circumstances, the amount of the fine will be determined.
(2) The amount of the penalty shall be reduced by 50% if the penalty is imposed on a person as an employed person.
(3) The amount of the penalty amount depends on the number of levels of subqualification. In order to determine the number of levels, the following levels are distinguished:
1. skipper;
(2) Steering man/machine;
3. volmatand/sailor's engine floorboard;
4. sailor;
5. light sailor.
Where, according to a minimum crew table, a dandelier is not to be replaced by a deksman, there is a crew member if there is a deksman instead of a light sailor. The deksman doesn't count for the minimum crew.
In the case of the under-qualification of:
• 1 level € 300,-;
• 2 levels € 700,-;
• 3 levels € 1,100,-;
• 4 levels € 1,400,-.
If, for example, a dandelier is present when a full-sailor is required to be present according to crew regulations, there is a 2-level deficit.
(4) The minimum crew of other vessels on the Rhine, Waal and Lek are listed under number 48 of the certificate of investigation ( Art. 3.19 Rsp ). If the prescribed minimum crew is not on board, the ship shall be used in violation of the requirements set out in the Certificate of Investigation ( Art. 10 Bvw ).
(5) In the bid book, the following designation shall be given: in columns 9 to 11, the beginning and end of the rest period of each crew member shall be recorded. These notes must be placed in the table of the vessel at the latest at 8 a.m. the following morning. This means that the beginning and the end of rest must be lodged no later than 8am on the day following the day when the rest has begun and the work has been resumed. So if the crew is going to rest on March 16 at 22:00 and returning to work at 7:00 p.m., the beginning and the end of rest must have been recorded by 8:00 a.m. at the latest by March 17.
Sab
Violation Description
Penalty amount
Fact code
| 19, first paragraph, part a |
Do not open by the owner of the ship from an account at a national institute |
€ 1000 |
BVW4a.001 |
| 19, first paragraph, part b |
Do not worry by the owner that skipper about a ED Card Has |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.002 |
| 20, 1st Member |
Non-payment of waste management contribution on the number of litres of gas oil |
€ 350 |
BVW4a.003 |
| 20, fourth member |
Not in duplicate of the proof of payment by the supplier of gas oil, with the number associated with the teal, number of litres of gas oil, amount of waste management contribution paid, date and time of bunkering |
€ 500 |
BVW4a.004 |
| 21, 1st Member |
Do not offer by the supplier of any other payment option to the owner of the ship |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.005 |
| 21, second paragraph, part a |
Not in triplicate of the confession by the skipper on behalf of the owner of the ship |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.006 |
| 21, second paragraph, part b |
Not in triplicate of the authorisation by the skipper on behalf of the owner of the ship |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.007 |
| 22, 1st Member |
Do not draw up a written bunker statement, containing the following information: name and address owner ship, name and address supplier, delivered number of liters, name and number ship, name skipper, level of waste management contribution, place and date of Act |
€ 500 |
BVW4a.008 |
| 22, second paragraph |
Failure to attach payment evidence, confession or authorisation by the supplier to the bunker declaration |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.009 |
| 22, third member |
Non-signing of the Bunker Statement by the supplier |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.010 |
| 23 |
Failure to sign the bunker statement by the skipper |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.011 |
| 24 |
Do not notify the skipper of the bunker statement. |
€ 250 |
BVW4a.012 |
| 25 |
Do not preserve by the supplier of the accumulated and signed bunker statement in his administration |
€ 500 |
BVW4a.013 |
| 26, first paragraph |
Not attach to the skipper of payment evidence, guilt or authority to copy of the bunker statement |
€ 50 |
BVW4a.014 |
| 26, second paragraph |
Not to be kept by the skipper of the copy and a copy of a certificate received by him from a certificate issued outside the Netherlands for a minimum of. 6 months |
€ 500 |
BVW4a.015 |
| 27 |
Do not supply the following data every month by the supplier to the designated service: name owner, number of litres of gas oil, name and number ship, manner and amount of payment |
€ 500 |
BVW4a.016 |
| 28a |
Do not report malfunction to the ATM without delay by the supplier |
€ 200 |
BVW4a.017 |
